Project Manual BUILDING #3 MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION BP [PDF]

foundation walls, interior slabs on grade. 4,000 PSI. 510. 0.50. No unless otherwise noted, and fill on metal deck. Clas

2 downloads 26 Views 874KB Size

Recommend Stories


Project Showcase - The Building - Bentley Systems [PDF]
Bentley's software for building teams empowers users at all phases of the project – from conceptual design and construction document through .... The Lantern will be an iconic commercial building at the entrance to the. Docklands ..... Arup created

mechanical properties of building materials
I want to sing like the birds sing, not worrying about who hears or what they think. Rumi

Building Guides Single Family Residential Addition
Before you speak, let your words pass through three gates: Is it true? Is it necessary? Is it kind?

Shelley Point Building Design Manual Shelley Point Building Design Manual
Just as there is no loss of basic energy in the universe, so no thought or action is without its effects,

highgate synagogue building project update
There are only two mistakes one can make along the road to truth; not going all the way, and not starting.

National Energy Efficient Building Project
I tried to make sense of the Four Books, until love arrived, and it all became a single syllable. Yunus

Building
Never wish them pain. That's not who you are. If they caused you pain, they must have pain inside. Wish

Building
Where there is ruin, there is hope for a treasure. Rumi

Building
Knock, And He'll open the door. Vanish, And He'll make you shine like the sun. Fall, And He'll raise

building
The greatest of richness is the richness of the soul. Prophet Muhammad (Peace be upon him)

Idea Transcript


Project Manual DATE: August 3, 2017

BUILDING #3 MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 9000 North Main Street Dayton, Ohio 45415

BP-2 • MECHANICAL BUILDING SHELL PACKAGE

PROJECT NUMBER: 3510.00

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

TABLE OF CONTENTS SERIES 00 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS REFER TO CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE FOR BIDDING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS REFER TO CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE FOR GENERAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02 4119 ..... SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 ..... CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 2113 ..... BRICK MASONRY 04 2200 ..... CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 1200 ..... STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 3100 ..... STEEL DECKING 05 4000 ..... COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 ..... METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5113 ..... METAL PAN STAIRS 05 5313 ..... BAR GRATINGS DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 1053 ..... MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1600 ..... SHEATHING DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1416 ..... COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1900 ..... WATER REPELLENTS 3510.00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

07 2100 ..... THERMAL INSULATION 07 2500 ..... WEATHER BARRIERS 07 5419 .... POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 07 6200 ..... SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 7129 .... MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS 07 8100 ..... APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 8446 ..... FIRESTOPPING 07 9200 ..... JOINT SEALANTS 07 9500 ..... EXPANSION CONTROL DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 1113 ..... HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 7100 ..... DOOR HARDWARE 08 9000 ..... LOUVERS AND VENTS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 2216 ..... NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2900 ..... GYPSUM BOARD 09 9113 ..... EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 ..... INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 4416 ..... FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE

3510.00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

DIVISION 21 - FIRE PROTECTION REFER TO DRAWINGS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING REFER TO DRAWINGS DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING REFER TO DRAWINGS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL REFER TO DRAWINGS DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS REFER TO DRAWINGS DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 1000 ..... SITE CLEARING 31 2000 ..... EARTH MOVING 31 5000 ..... EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS REFER TO DRAWINGS

3510.00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and belowgrade improvements.

DEFINITIONS A.

Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B.

Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C.

Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D.

Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4

MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.

3510.00

Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 01

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.5

2017

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.

Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.6

Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

1.7

Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. 1.8

Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. FIELD CONDITIONS

A.

Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B.

Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C.

Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D.

Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1.

If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E.

Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F.

Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

3510.00

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 02

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

2017

Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B.

Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C.

When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2

UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A.

Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B.

Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 03

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

3.3

2017

Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

PREPARATION A.

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.

B.

Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1.

3510.00

Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 04

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.4

2017

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A.

General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B.

3.5

Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A.

Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B.

Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C.

Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

3510.00

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 05

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION D.

3.6

2017

Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A.

General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site. 1. 2. 3.

Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B.

Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C.

Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7

CLEANING A.

Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 02 4119

3510.00

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

02 4119 - 06

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

DEFINITIONS A.

Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly ash, other pozzolans; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B.

W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.

Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

3510.00

Contractor's superintendent. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. Concrete Subcontractor. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.5

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.

C.

1.6

Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Qualification Data: On request only, for Installer, manufacturer, and/or testing agency.

B.

Welding certificates.

C.

Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Cementitious materials. Admixtures. Steel reinforcement and accessories. Waterstops. Curing compounds. Floor and slab treatments. Bonding agents. Adhesives. Vapor retarders. Semirigid joint filler. Joint-filler strips. Repair materials.

D.

Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

E.

Field quality-control reports.

F.

Minutes of preinstallation conference.

3510.00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.7

2017

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.

C.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. 2.

D.

1.8

Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

Reference standards: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

E.

Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. ACI 315R, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. ACI 347R, Guide to Formwork for Concrete. ACI 302.1R, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. "Placing Reinforcing Bars", CRSI & WCRSI Recommended Practice. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete. ACI 117, Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

Welding Qualifications: AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

Qualify

procedures

and

personnel

according

to

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B.

Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

3510.00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.9

2017

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. 2. 3.

B.

Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows: 1.

2.

1.10 A.

When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

FIELD REFERENCE MANUALS Provide at least one copy of the ACI Field Reference Manual, SP-15 (1.3.3), and one copy of CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" in the field office at all times.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

CONCRETE, GENERAL A.

ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. 2.

2.2

ACI 301 (ACI 301M). ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

FORM-FACING MATERIALS A.

Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1.

3510.00

Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.

2017

Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. b. c. d.

High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B.

Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C.

Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1.

D.

Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. 2. 3.

2.3

Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B.

Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), or deformed bars, assembled with clips.

C.

Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

D.

Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4

REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A.

3510.00

Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.

C.

Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

D.

Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. 2. 3.

2.5

For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymercoated wire bar supports. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

CONCRETE MATERIALS A.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B.

Cementitious Materials: 1.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, gray. Supplement with the following: a. b.

C.

Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. 2. 3.

D.

3510.00

Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C, may be used up to a maximum of 20% of the total cementitious content. The exact percentages used shall be based on a successful test placement onsite.

Use size no. 8 for coarse aggregate in topping on stair pans. For all other classes, use size no. 57. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

Aggregate for Ground and Polished Concrete:

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

2017

ASTM C 33, graded, Crushed River Rock. 1-1/2” to 3/4” nominal aggregate size. Aggregate to be uniformly graded of not less than 3 aggregate sizes – fine, intermediate and large.

E.

Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C 330M, 3/4-inch (19-mm nominal maximum aggregate size.

F.

Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

G.

Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

H. 2.6

Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. GROUT MATERIALS

A.

Grout for masonry core fill: ASTM C476, coarse type.

B.

Non Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: The non-shrink grout shall be a factory pre-mixed grout and shall conform to ASTM C1107, “Standard Specification for Package Dry, HydraulicCement Grout (Non-Shrink)." In addition, the grout manufacturer shall furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95% bearing under a 4’ x 4’ base plate. The following are acceptable: 1. 2. 3.

C.

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by BASF The Chemical Co. by U.S. Grout Corp.

High Flow Grout: Where high fluidity and/or increased placing time is required, use high flow grout. The factory pre-mixed grout shall conform to ASTM C1107 “Standard Specification for Packages Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink)." IN addition, the grout manufacturer shall furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve a 95% bearing under a 18” x 36” base plate. The following are acceptable: 1. 2.

3510.00

N S Grout Masterflow 713 Five Star Grout

Hi-Flow Grout Masterflow 928

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by BASF The Chemical Co.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

D.

All column base plates, equipment bases, and other locations noted on the structural drawings shall be grouted with the specified non shrink grout, with minimum 28-day strength of 9,000 psi.

E.

Water: Potable.

2.7

WATERSTOPS A.

Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. 2.

2.8

Profile: Flat dumbbell with center bulb. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick); nontapered.

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, 15 mil (minimum). Permeance of .01 maximum per ASTM E 154, Sections 8, 11, 12, and 13. Tensile Strength not less than 45 lbf/in. Puncture resistance: 2200 grams. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.9

Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator. Flatiron Films; Iron Bar 15. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap. Raven Industries; Vaporblock VB15.

GRANULAR FILL A.

2.10 A.

3510.00

Granular Fill (Stone Subbase): Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D448, size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1½" (37.5 mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a #8 sieve. LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.11 A.

2017

Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard (J-17). Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Euco Diamond Hard. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; LIQUI-HARD.

CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.

B.

Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C.

Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D.

Water: Potable.

E.

Verify curing compound is compatible with the applied finish prior to placement.

F.

Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC Compliant, 700g/l): Liquid type membrane-forming curing compound, clear styrene acrylate type, complying with ASTM C1315, Type I, Class B, 25% solids content minimum. Moisture loss shall be not more than 0.30 Kg/m2 when applied at 300 sq. ft./gal. Manufacturers certification is required. Subject to project requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. 2. 3.

G.

3510.00

Super rez Seal Materseal 30 Kure N Seal 30

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by BASF The Chemical Co. by Sonneborn

Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC Compliant, 350g/l): Liquid type membrane-forming curing compound, clear styrene acrylate type, complying with ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, 25% solids content minimum. Moisture loss shall be not more than 0.40 Kg/m2 when

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

applied at 300 sq. ft./gal. Manufacturers certification is required. Subject to project requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. 2. 3. H.

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by The Euclid Chemical Co. by BASF The Chemical Co.

Curing Compound (Strippable): The compound shall conform to ASTM C309 and is to be used on slabs that are to receive subsequent applied finishes and where noted on the drawings. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and supervision. Verify compound is compatible with the applied finish prior to placement, subject to approval the following are acceptable: 1. 2.

2.12

Super Diamond Clear VOX Super Rrez SealVOX Masterkure 100W

Kurez DR VOX Kurez W VOX

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by The Euclid Chemical Co.

RELATED MATERIALS

A.

Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B.

Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

C.

Bonding and Repair Materials: 1.

Structural Bonding Compound: Epoxy adhesive, 100% solids, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surface. The following are acceptable: a. b. c.

2.

Patching Compound, Epoxy Type: 100% solids suitable for use on dry or damp surface. The following are acceptable: a. b. c.

3.

Euco Epoxy #352 or #452 Series by The Euclid Chemical Co. Sikadur Hi Mod by Sika Chemical Co. Epoxtite 2390 by A. C. Horn, Inc.

Euco Epoxy #456 mortar Sikadur Lo Mod Mortar Epoxitite 2390 Mortar

Polymer Patching Mortar: The following are acceptable: a.

Horizontal applications: 1) 2) 3) 4)

3510.00

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by Sika Chemical Co. by A. C. Horn, Inc.

Top Thin Supreme Concrete Top Supreme Patchwell Sikatop 122

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by The Euclid Chemical Co. by Kaufman Company by Sika Chemical Co.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION b.

Vertical applications: 1) 2) 3)

4.

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by The Euclid Chemical Co. by Sika Chemical Co.

Flo-Top

by The Euclid Chemical Co.

Repair Topping: Self-leveling, polymer modified high strength topping. following are acceptable: a.

6.

Verticoat Verticoat Supreme Sikatop 123

Underlayment compound: Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable cementitious base compound. Compound shall have a compressive strength conforming to ASTM C109 of 3,600 psi at 7 days and 5,000 psi at 28 days and a bond strength conforming to ASTM C1042 of 700 psi at 7 days and 1,000 psi at 28 days. The following are acceptable: a.

5.

2017

Thin-Top Supreme

by The Euclid Chemical Co.

Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate, rewettable type. subject to moisture. The following are acceptable: a. b. c.

Euco Weld Weldcrete Daraweld C

The

Use only in areas not

by The Euclid Chemical Co. by Larson Products by W.R. Grace Co.

D.

Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

E.

Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

3510.00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2.13 A.

CONCRETE MIXTURES The following classes of concrete are required:

Type

F'c at 28 days

Class I footings, grade beams, and all other below grade concrete Class II foundation walls, interior slabs on grade unless otherwise noted, and fill on metal deck Class III Interior slabs on grade which receive moisture sensitive floor coverings Class IV exterior flat work, garage slab on grade, any other concrete exposed to weather Class V stair pan fill Class VI Lean concrete fill 1.

2. 3.

3510.00

2017

Minimum Cementitious Content

Maximum Water Cementitious Ratio

Air Content

3,000 PSI

470

--

No

4,000 PSI

510

0.50

No

4,000 PSI

540

0.45

No

4,000 PSI

610

0.45

4,000 PSI

510

0.50

No

1,500 PSI

375

--

optional

5-7%

Slump: All concrete containing the high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) shall have a maximum slump of 8 inches unless approved by the Architect. The concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 2 to 3 inches, to be verified, then the high-range water-reducing admixture added to increase the slump to the approved level. All other concrete shall have a maximum slump of 5 inches for all members, unless otherwise noted. For the high-range water-reducing admixture added at the batch plant, verification is to be provided that the water-to-cement ratio has not been exceeded. Use no. 8 coarse aggregate for metal stair pan fill, Class V. Supplementary cementitious materials, fly ash slab, are permitted in all classes.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 12

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 4. 5. 6.

7.

B.

3. 4.

A. 2.15 A.

Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 115 lb/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m), plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. (48.1 kg/cu. m) as determined by ASTM C 567/C 567M. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." CONCRETE MIXING Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1.

3510.00

All other concrete is to be ready-mixed. All admixtures, except superplasticizer, are to be added at the batch plant. Superplasticizer may be added at the jobsite through an approved dispenser. Mixes intended to be pumped are to be so identified on the mix design submitted for approval. All pumped mixes are to have a mid-range or high-range waterreducer. Maximum slump at the pump shall be 7” for concrete containing the midrange water-reducing admixture and 9” for concrete containing the high-range water-reducing admixture. All concrete for Classes II, III, and IV shall contain the specified water-reducing or water-reducing/retarding admixture, mid-range water-reducing admixture and/or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). All concrete slabs, placed at air temperature below 50 degrees F shall contain the specified non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. All concrete placed at air temperature above 90 degrees shall contain the specified water-reducing/retarding admixture. All concrete required to be air-entrained shall contain an approved air-entraining admixture. All pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, architectural concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious ratio below 0.50 shall contain the specified high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer). Concrete with a water-cementitious ratio above 0.45 may contain the specified midrange water-reducing admixture.

Suspended Slabs: Lightweight concrete. 1. 2.

2.14

2017

When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 13

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

FORMWORK INSTALLATION A.

Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B.

Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

C.

Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. 2.

Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D.

Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E.

Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. 2.

Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F.

Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G.

Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H.

Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete where indicated.

I.

Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J.

Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K.

Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L.

Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3510.00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 14

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.2

2017

EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A.

Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. 2. 3.

3.3

Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A.

Remove no forms within first 24 hours after placement.

B.

When structure is to be reshored, forms may be removed when the concrete attains 75% of its design strength.

C.

Shoring is to remain in place until concrete reaches it design strength. Windsor Pentrometer is to be used to verify in place strength if forms are removed prior to 7 days after casting concrete. 1.

D.

3.4

Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

When the average daily temperature has been below 50 degrees F for the duration of the curing period, forms may not be removed until the actual in place strength of the concrete is demonstrated by two field cured test cylinders or by Windsor Pentrometer, regardless of the results of tests on laboratory cured cylinders. VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A.

Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

3.5

Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A.

General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1.

3510.00

Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 15

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C.

Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1.

Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D.

Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E.

Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F.

Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

3.6

JOINTS A.

General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B.

Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

Contraction Joints in Interior Slabs-on-Grade: 1.

3510.00

Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

Locate control (contraction) joints as shown on the Drawings. In the absence of information on Drawings, locate at openings, walls, columns, grid lines, and inside corners. The maximum spacing of contraction (control) joints, for reinforced and unreinforced slabs, is to be 30 times the slab thickness (i.e. for a 4 inch slab the maximum spacing is 10 feet). Cut joints 1/4 times the slab thickness. The Soff-Cut Saw shall be used immediately after final finishing. A conventional saw shall be used CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 16

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

as soon as possible without dislodging aggregate. Schedule slab pours and sawcutting operations such that sawing is completed prior to onset of shrinkage cracking. 2.

D.

Joints in Exterior Slabs-on-Grade: Locate joints as shown on Drawings: In the absence of information on Drwaings, provide the following (sidewalks only): 1. 2.

E.

2. 3.

3.7

Expansion joints: Full depth, with ½ inch joint filler, where slabs abut vertical surfaces, at intersection of sidewalks, at abrupt changes in width, and at a spacing not exceeding 30 feet. Control joints: Tooled, 1 inch deep, 4’-0” to 6’-0” on center between expansion joints.

Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at exterior slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1.

F.

Provide isolation joints at columns (1/2 inch thick) and at walls (1/8 inch thick). Where isolation joint will be exposed to view, set top of joint filler below top of slab a distance equal to the filler thickness, to receive sealant. Where not exposed to view, set top of filler flush with top of slab. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A.

3.8

Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A.

3510.00

Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 17

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C.

Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1.

D.

Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. 2. 3.

E.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. 2.

3510.00

Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1.

F.

Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 18

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3. G.

Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1.

2.

3.9

2017

Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A.

Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1.

B.

Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1.

C.

Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1.

2.

3.

3510.00

Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 19

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION D.

3.10

2017

Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS, GENERAL

A.

General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B.

Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1.

C.

Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. 2.

Apply a hand-trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a.

3.

3.11

Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabson-grade.

Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A.

Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B.

Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

3510.00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 20

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION C.

Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6. D.

3.12

2017

Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Construct concrete bases 4 inches (100 mm) high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces. CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A.

General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B.

Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C.

Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D.

Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E.

Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1.

Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b.

3510.00

Water. Continuous water-fog spray.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 21

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION c. 2.

b. c.

3.13 A.

Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moistureretaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a.

4.

Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a.

3.

2017

Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 14 days' old. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 22

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

3.14 A.

2017

Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. JOINT FILLING Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B.

Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C.

Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.15

CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A.

Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B.

Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 21/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C.

Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1.

2.

3. D.

3510.00

Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 23

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

2017

Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E.

Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F.

Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.16

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing and Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Inspections: 1. 2.

3510.00

Steel reinforcement placement. Headed bolts and studs. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 24

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3. 4. 5. C.

Verification of use of required design mixture. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. 2.

Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a.

3. 4.

5. 6. 7.

b. 8.

When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a.

Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratorycured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. b.

3510.00

2017

Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 25

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 9. 10.

11.

12. 13.

14. 15. D.

3.17 A.

2017

When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

Determination of the flatness and levelness of a concrete slab shall be made on the day following placement of the first concrete pour. Tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). After it is established that proper procedures are being utilized to obtain the desired results, flatness/levelness tests shall be conducted only as directed by the Owner. PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION 03 3000

3510.00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 3000 - 26

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 04 2113 - BRICK MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.3

Face brick. Mortar and grout. Ties and anchors. Embedded flashing. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry anchors. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for brick masonry. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for board insulation used in cavity walls. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. Section 07 1900 "Water Repellents" for water-repellent treatments for brick surfaces.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: For the following: 1.

C.

Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1.

3510.00

Cast Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles and locations of each cast stone trim unit required.

Face brick. BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.4

2017

Special brick shapes. Colored mortar. Weep holes and vents. Accessories embedded in masonry.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1.

Masonry units. a. b. c.

2. 3. 4. 5. B.

1.5

Include data on material properties. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67.

Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B.

Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

C.

Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

3510.00

Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

C.

Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

D.

Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1.

B.

Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

3510.00

Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.

D.

Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.

Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A.

2.2

Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. BRICK

A.

General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. b. c.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Grade: SW. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." Size: To match existing. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated. a.

3510.00

Belden Brick Company: Modular Belcrest 130 A (FB-1) Belden Brick Company: Modular Belcrest 530 A (FB-2). Belden Brick Company: Modular Mojave Blend A (FB-3)

Accent brick locations as indicated on the drawings

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.3

2017

MORTAR MATERIALS A.

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for coldweather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce the following colors: 1.

Flamingo Brixment C-224 (M-1) Ohio River Masonry Sand (to match existing color).

2.

Flamingo Brixment R-13 (M-2) Ohio River Masonry Sand (to match existing color).

3.

There shall be no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet.

B.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

D.

Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

E.

Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. 2.

F.

Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1.

2.

3510.00

For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a.

Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.

b.

Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.

c.

Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.

If used admixtures shall be added at the same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions to ensure mortar color is consistent.

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.4

2017

REINFORCEMENT A.

2.5

Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. TIES AND ANCHORS

A.

Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304or Type 316. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

B.

Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C.

Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

D.

1.

Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch-(1.52-mm-) thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.

2.

Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch-(4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1.

General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. b. c.

3510.00

Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a100-lbf (445N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 1.05inch-(2.66-mm-)thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch-(6.35-mm-)diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.6

2017

MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A.

2.7

Dovetail Slots in Concrete: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.034-inch (0.86-mm), galvanized steel sheet. EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A.

Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) 2) 3) 4)

B.

Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., C-Fab Flashing. Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Coated Thru-Wall Flashing.

Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Where flashing is indicated to receive counter flashing, use metal flashing. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge. Where flashing is fully concealed, use flexible flashing.

C.

Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

D.

Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.8

MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A.

Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC.

B.

Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

C.

Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

3510.00

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) 2) 3)

D.

Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Maze weep vent. Dur-O-Wal; a Hohmann & Barnard company; Cell Vents. Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. b. c.

2.

Advanced Building Products Inc; Mortar Break II. Dur-O-Wal; a Hohmann & Barnard company; Polytite Mortar Stop. Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net.

Provide one of the following configurations: a. b. c.

2.9

2017

Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped notches7 inches (175 mm)deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.

MASONRY CLEANERS A.

Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.

3510.00

Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a division of Sandell Construction Solutions. EaCo Chem, Inc. PROSOCO, Inc.

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.10 A.

2017

MORTAR MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C.

Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated.

D.

Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. 2.

Mix to match existing mortar. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a.

Face brick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

B.

Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C.

Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

3510.00

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. D.

3.3

2017

Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. TOLERANCES

A.

Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Lines and Levels: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7.

C.

For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

Joints: 1. 2.

3510.00

For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm); do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.

3.4

2017

For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.

LAYING MASONRY WALLS A.

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B.

Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C.

Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D.

Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E.

Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3.5

MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A.

Lay hollow brick as follows: 1. 2.

With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings.

B.

Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C.

Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.6

ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A.

3510.00

Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following:

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3.

3.7

2017

Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm)wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A.

Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.8

Fasten anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.

EXPANSION JOINTS A.

General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B.

Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 1.

3510.00

Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 12

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.9

2017

LINTELS A.

Install steel lintels where indicated.

B.

Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.10

FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A.

General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B.

Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1.

2. 3. 4.

5.

Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm). At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C.

Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

D.

Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. 2.

E.

3.11 A. 3510.00

Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 13

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B.

Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

C.

Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

3.12

REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A.

Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B.

Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D.

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Do not clean pre-fabricated stone panels with masonry cleaner. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in "BIA Technical Notes 20." Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION 04 2113

3510.00

BRICK MASONRY

04 2113 - 14

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 04 2200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Concrete masonry units. Mortar and grout. Steel reinforcing bars. Masonry-joint reinforcement. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed in cavity walls.

DEFINITIONS A.

CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B.

Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.

1.5

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ACTION SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

Shop Drawings: For the following:

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3.

1.6

2017

Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B.

Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1.

Masonry units. a. b.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C.

Include data on material properties, and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

Integral water repellant used in CMUs. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. Mortar admixtures. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. Reinforcing bars. Joint reinforcement. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. 2.

Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

D.

Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

E.

Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.7

2017

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B.

Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D.

Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E.

Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.8

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1.

Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place.

B.

Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C.

Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

3510.00

Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

E.

2017

Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B.

Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. 2.

2.3

Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.

UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A.

Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B.

Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet (6 m) vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.

C.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. 1.

3510.00

Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.4

2017

CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A.

Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

B.

CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. 2. 3.

2.5

Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa). Density Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch (10 mm) less-than-nominal dimensions.

CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS A.

General: Provide one of the following:

B.

Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.

C.

Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," and with reinforcing bars indicated.

2.6

MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

B.

Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

C.

Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

D.

Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for glazed or pre-faced masonry units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.

E.

Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

F.

Water: Potable.

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.7

2017

REINFORCEMENT A.

Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B.

Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 1.

Products a. b. c. d.

C.

Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

D.

General:

Ladder

type

complying

with

Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized carbon steel. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm diameter. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

Masonry Cleaner: 1. 2.

2.8

Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. Heckman Building Products, Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. Hohman & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB – Twin Rebar Positioner. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

Use potable water and detergents to clean masonry unless otherwise acceptable. Unless otherwise required, do not use acid or caustic solutions.

TIES AND ANCHORS A.

General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into masonry but with at least a 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

B.

Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 coating. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 4. C.

2017

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. 2.

Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D.

Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch-(2.66-mm-)thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-(9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hotdip galvanized after fabrication.

E.

Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated. 1.

2.9

Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A.

Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC.

B.

Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C.

Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

2.10 A.

MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3510.00

Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Use masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. For exterior masonry, use masonry cement or mortar cement mortar. For reinforced masonry, use masonry cement or mortar cement mortar.

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 5.

2017

Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B.

Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C.

Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. 2. 3.

E.

For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type coarse that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 3000 psi (21 MPa). Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

Application: Use epoxy pointing mortar for exposed mortar joints with pre-faced CMUs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3510.00

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond.

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

B.

Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

C.

Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.3

TOLERANCES A.

Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Lines and Levels: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

3510.00

For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 7. C.

For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

Joints: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.4

2017

For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

LAYING MASONRY WALLS A.

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B.

Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C.

Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches (100 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D.

Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E.

Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F.

Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

H.

Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I.

Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2.

3. 4.

3.5

2017

Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A.

Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B.

Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C.

Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar holes. 1. 2. 3.

Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.

D.

Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of ¼ inch (6 mm) and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer’s written instructions.

E.

Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing unless otherwise indicated.

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.6

2017

MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A.

General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, ½ inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. 2. 3.

Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B.

Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D.

Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E.

Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7

ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A.

Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3.

3.8

Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A.

General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B.

Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. 2.

3510.00

Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 12

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.

3.9

2017

Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of sealant.

BOND BEAMS A.

Continuous bond beams shall be located at the following locations and as noted on the plans: 1. 2. 3.

Top of parapet walls Under roof framing bearing locations Floor framing bearing locations

B.

Bond beam reinforcing shall be continuous through control joints at bearing walls, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

C.

Continuous bond beams shall be located at the top of non-load bearing partition walls. 1.

3.10

Where joists pass through the concrete masonry wall, bond beam shall be lowered so the bond beam is not cut by the joist pass-thru.

LINTELS

A.

Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B.

Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 A.

REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1.

2.

Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B.

Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C.

Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 13

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3.12

2017

Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B.

Inspections: Special inspections according to Level C in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. 1. 2. 3.

Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C.

Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D.

Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

E.

Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F.

Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

G.

Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

H.

Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.

3.13

REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A.

Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B.

Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 14

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION D.

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.14

2017

Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 84A.

MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A.

Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B.

Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. 2. 3.

Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

C.

Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

D.

Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 04 2200

3510.00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

04 2200 - 15

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Structural steel. Grout.

Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other steel items not defined as structural steel.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B.

Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

1.5

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.

3510.00

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.6

2017

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint qualified by testing, including the following: 1. 2.

C.

1.7

Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Include embedment Drawings. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

Power source (constant current or constant voltage). Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.

Fabrication facility is to be a member of the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

B.

Welding certificates.

C.

Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D.

Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

E.

Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

F.

3510.00

Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. Direct-tension indicators. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. Shear stud connectors. Shop primers. Nonshrink grout.

Source quality-control reports.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION G. 1.8

2017

Field quality-control and special inspection reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B.

Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C.

Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P3 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

E.

Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. 2. 3.

1.9

personnel

according

to

AISC 303. AISC 360. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1.

B.

Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. 2.

Select and complete connections using [schematic details indicated and AISC 360. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.

B.

Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C.

Construction: Shear wall system.

2.2

STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A.

W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B.

Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C.

Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D.

Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.s

F.

Welding Electrodes: 1. 2.

2.3

Use E70XX electrode unless noted otherwise. Comply with AWS requirements.

BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A.

High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavyhex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1.

B.

3510.00

Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavyhex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish. 1. C.

Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M, Type 10.9), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1.

Finish: Plain.

D.

Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, coldfinished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

E.

Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

F.

Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 1. 2. 3. 4.

G.

Configuration: Straight. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain.

Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain.

Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. 2. 3.

Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. Finish: Plain.

H.

Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

I.

Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.

J.

Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.

2.4

PRIMER A.

3510.00

Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B. 2.5

2017

Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20. GROUT

A.

2.6

Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. FABRICATION

A.

Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Camber structural-steel members where indicated. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.

Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1.

Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C.

Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D.

Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E.

Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

F.

Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

G.

Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. 2.

3510.00

Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION H.

2.7

2017

Closure Plates: Provide minimum 1/4 inch closure plates at all Hollow Structural Steel tube ends, U.N.O. on plans.

SHOP CONNECTIONS A.

Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1.

2.8

Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

SHOP PRIMING A.

Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. 2.

C.

2.9

Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). Surfaces to be field welded. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). Galvanized surfaces. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. GALVANIZING

A.

Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. 2.

3510.00

Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. Galvanize lintels, shelf angles, and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.10 A.

2017

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1.

Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B.

Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C.

Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. 2.

E.

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1.

B.

3510.00

Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.2

2017

PREPARATION A.

Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1.

3.3

Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

ERECTION A.

Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B.

Baseplates, Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C.

Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D.

Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. 2.

Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E.

Splice members only where indicated.

F.

Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G.

Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3510.00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION H.

3.4

2017

Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. FIELD CONNECTIONS

A.

High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1.

B.

Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. 2. 3.

3.5

Joint Type: Snug tightened.

Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. 2. 3.

Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B.

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C.

Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D.

Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1.

In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a.

3510.00

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION b. c. d. 3.6

2017

Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.

Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 powertool cleaning.

END OF SECTION 05 1200

3510.00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

05 1200 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Roof deck. Composite floor deck.

Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: 1.

1.4

Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Welding certificates.

B.

Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C.

Field quality-control reports.

3510.00

STEEL DECKING

05 3100 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.5

2017

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C.

FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.

1.6

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B.

Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.

2.2

Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

ROOF DECK A.

Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3510.00

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade (40) 275, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. Deck Profile: As indicated. Profile Depth: As indicated Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. Span Condition: Triple span or more. STEEL DECKING

05 3100 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 6. 2.3

2017

Side Laps: Overlapped.

COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A.

Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.4

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade (33) 230, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. Profile Depth: As indicated. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. Span Condition: Triple span or more.

ACCESSORIES A.

General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B.

Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C.

Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D.

Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E.

Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F.

Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.

G.

Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H.

Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

I.

Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

J.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

3510.00

STEEL DECKING

05 3100 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B.

Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C.

Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D.

Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E.

Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

F.

Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

G.

Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3

ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION A.

Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 11/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1. 2.

B.

3510.00

Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm) nominal. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds [as indicated.

Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: As indicated on drawings.

STEEL DECKING

05 3100 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION C.

End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 11/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1.

D.

Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten.

Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1.

3.4

End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum .

Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten] flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fastenersnot more than 4 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one fastener at each corner. 1.

E.

2017

Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION A.

Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: 1. 2.

Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm) apart.

B.

Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: As indicated on drawings.

C.

End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 11/2 inches (38 mm) with end joints as follows: 1.

End Joints: Butted.

D.

Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

3.5

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

3510.00

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. STEEL DECKING

05 3100 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C.

Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D.

Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E.

Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.6

PROTECTION A.

Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 05 3100

3510.00

STEEL DECKING

05 3100 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 05 4000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.

Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for standard, interior non-loadbearing, metal-stud framing, with height limitations and ceiling-suspension assemblies.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

Shop Drawings: 1. 2.

1.4

Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Welding certificates.

B.

Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

C.

Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. 2.

3510.00

Steel sheet. Expansion anchors. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.5

2017

Power-actuated anchors. Mechanical fasteners. Vertical deflection clips. Horizontal drift deflection clips Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Standards: Comply with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) “Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Structural Steel Members”, except as otherwise indicated. 1.

The minimum uncoated thickness of the cold-formed framing delivered to the project shall not be less than 95 percent of the design thickness indicated. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at the bends due to cold forming.

B.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Minimum three years’ experience in similar inspection, qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C.

Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or inhouse testing with calibrated test equipment, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

D.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

E.

Fire-rated assemblies: Where work is indicated to comply with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and installations identical to applicable tested and listed components and assemblies.

F.

Provide each type of cold-formed metal framing required produced by one manufacturer.

G.

Reference standards: 1.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. b. c. d.

3510.00

ASTM A653 “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.” ASTM A780 “Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings.” ASTM A924 “Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.” ASTM A1003 “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION e. f. 2.

ASTM C955 “Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases.” ASTM C1007 “Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories.”

American Welding Society (AWS): a. b. c.

3.

2017

AWS A2.4 “Symbols for Welding and Nondestructive Testing.” AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code-Steel.” AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel.”

Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries-International (AWCI) and Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (ML/SFA): a.

AWCI-ML/SFA “Steel Framing Systems Manual.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200.

B.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.

2.2

Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS A.

Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of thickness and grade as follows: 1.

Design Thickness: a.

2. 3. 4. B.

3510.00

33 mils – 0.0346 inches – 20 gage.

43 mils (18 gage) and lighter C-shaped components: minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. Track and bridging components: minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. Connection Clip Angles and Vertical or Horizontal Deflection Angle connections: minimum yield point of 50,000 psi.

Sustainability Requirements:

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. C.

2017

All steel for cold-formed metal framing members and shapes shall have a minimum 25% post-consumer recycled content.

Framing Components: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped cold-formed metal studs having punched and/or un-punched webs with stiffened flanges shall comply with ASTM C955. Provide sizes, shapes, and gages indicated. Nomenclature used on the drawings is designated by: Depth, Shape, Width, and Thickness of framing components. i.e.: 600S16254. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Depth: The number represents the depth of the member multiplied by 100 and expressed as a whole number. i.e.: 362 = 3 5/8”, 600 = 6”, 800 = 8”. Shape: S – C-shaped members; T – track member; F – furring channel; U – Ushaped channel. Width: The number represents the flange width of the member multiplied by 100 and expressed as a whole number. i.e.: 162 = 1 5/8”; 200 = 2”; 250 = 2 ½”. Thickness: Expressed in mils as defined above.

D.

System Accessories: Provide manufacturer’s standard steel tracks, bridging, blocking, clip angles, reinforcements, stiffeners, fasteners, braces, and accessories for each type of coldformed metal framing required. Provide all components recommended by the manufacturer for the applications indicated and as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.

E.

Finish: 1. 2. 3.

F.

Galvanized: Provide framing components; studs, joists, rafters, and headers, with protective zinc coating complying with ASSTM A1003, minimum G60 coating. Provide connection components; clip angles, deflection angles, joist hangers, hurricane ties, holdowns, etc., with protective zinc coating complying with ASTM A1003, minimum G90 coating. Galvanizing repair paint: Tnemec Co., Inc. – No. 92 “Tneme-Zinc”; SSPC-Paint 20; or an approved equal zinc-rich primer paint.

Fasteners: 1. 2. 3.

Manufacturer’s recommended self-drilling, self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, and washers with hot-dip galvanized finished complying with ASTM C1513. Anchorage devices: Powder-actuated fasteners (PAF), anchor bolts, drilled expansion anchors, or chemical anchors. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 when applicable, and AWS D1.3 for welding base metals less than 1/8” thick.

G.

Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing agents, and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107, with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time having a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5,000 psi.

H.

Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, non-leaching.

3510.00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION I.

2.3

2017

Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required. EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A.

Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.

B.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm.

Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm) Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)

C.

Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

D.

Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. 2.

E.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) Flange Width: 2 inch (50 mm).

Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1.

Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: a. b.

2.

Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows: a. b.

F.

3510.00

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm). Flange Width: 2 inch (50 mm).

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm). Flange Width: 3 inch (75 mm).

Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.4

2017

FABRICATION A.

Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. 2. 3.

Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. b.

4.

Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B.

Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C.

Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. 2.

Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum outof-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3510.00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.2

2017

PREPARATION A.

Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B.

After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fireresistive materials below that required to obtain fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C.

Install load-bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D.

Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

3.3

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B.

Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C.

Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1.

D.

Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. 2.

Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. b.

E.

3510.00

Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

F.

Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G.

Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H.

Install insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I.

Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

3.4

EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A.

Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B.

Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1.

Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm).

C.

Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D.

Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. 2. 3. 4.

E.

Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel framing and anchor to building structure.

Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION F.

3.5

2017

Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wallframing system. ERECTION TOLERANCES

A.

Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1.

3.6

Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C.

Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D.

Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E.

Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.7

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.

Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 05 4000

3510.00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05 4000 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Loose steel lintels. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.

Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3510.00

Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. Shelf angles. Metal ladders. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.

Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. Section 04 2200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. Section 04 2113 "Brick Masonry" for installing loose lintels, into brick masonry. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing." Section 05 5113 "Metal Pans Stairs" Section 05 5313 "Bar Gratings"

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.3

2017

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B.

Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.5

Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. Shelf angles. Metal ladders. Loose steel lintels.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

1.6

Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1.

1.7

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

3510.00

Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

METALS A.

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2

FASTENERS A.

Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

B.

Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1.

Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

D.

Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E.

Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

F.

Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. 2.

3510.00

Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group (1) A1stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.3

2017

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1.

Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B.

Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

C.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.4

FABRICATION, GENERAL A.

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D.

Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E.

Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3510.00

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

F.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flathead (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G.

Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J.

Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.5

MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.

General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B.

Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. 2.

2.6

Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

SHELF ANGLES A.

Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

Provide mitered and welded units at corners. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint.

B.

For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C.

Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.

3510.00

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION D. 2.7

2017

Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. METAL LADDERS

A.

General: 1.

B.

Steel Ladders: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

2.8

For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges. Rungs: 3/4-inch-(19-mm) diameter steel bars. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminumoxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Galvanize ladders, including brackets.

LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A.

Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B.

Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

D.

Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.9

STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A.

3510.00

Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.10

2017

FINISHES, GENERAL

A.

Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B.

Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.11 A.

STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1.

Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B.

Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C.

Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1.

Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

3510.00

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2

INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.

General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B.

Anchor supports securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C.

Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1.

3.3

Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B.

Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink

3510.00

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting." or Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

C.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 05 5000

3510.00

METAL FABRICATIONS

05 5000 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 05 5113 - METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled . Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.

Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C.

Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following: 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Prefilled metal-pan-stair treads. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate finishes. Paint products. METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C.

Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of nosing and tread.

D.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.5

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Welding certificates.

B.

Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B.

Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.

3510.00

Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less.

Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. b. c. 2.

b.

Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.

2.2

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Infill of Guards: a.

D.

2017

Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

METALS A.

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B.

D.

Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

E.

Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads.

2.3

FASTENERS A.

General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B.

Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

3510.00

METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

D.

Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be galvanized, and stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer.

Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. 2.

2.4

2017

Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1.

Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B.

Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

C.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E.

Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.

G.

Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm), W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.

3510.00

asphalt

METAL PAN STAIRS

emulsion

complying

with

05 5113 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.5

2017

FABRICATION, GENERAL A.

Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. 2.

Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B.

Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E.

Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F.

Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

G.

2.6

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A.

NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B.

Stair Framing: 1.

3510.00

Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. 2. 3. 4. C.

Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they are concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication. Provide epoxy-resin-filled treads, reinforced with glass fibers, with slip-resistant, abrasive surface. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. a.

2.7

2017

Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits.

STAIR RAILINGS A.

Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. 2.

B.

Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1.

C. 3510.00

Rails and Posts: 1-1/2-inches- (38-mm-) diameter top and bottom rails. Picket Infill: 3/4-inch- round pickets spaced less than 4 inches (100 mm) clear.

Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes are okay as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

Form changes in direction of railings as follows: METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3. 4.

2017

As detailed. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.

D.

For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E.

Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

F.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

G.

Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

H.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. 2.

I.

2.8

For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction.

Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. FINISHES

A.

Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B.

Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. 2.

3510.00

Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

C.

Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D.

Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS A.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C.

Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

E.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

F.

Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G.

Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.2

INSTALLING RAILINGS A.

Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 1. 2.

3510.00

Anchor posts to steel by welding or bolting to steel supporting members. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.

METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.3

2017

For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardanttreated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.

B.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 05 5113

3510.00

METAL PAN STAIRS

05 5113 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 05 5313 - BAR GRATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Metal bar gratings.

Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system components.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Delegated Design: Design gratings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. 2.

1.4

Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 60 lbf/sq. ft. (2.87 kN/sq. m). Limit deflection to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.

B.

3510.00

Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. Paint products.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION C.

1.5

2017

Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

B.

Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C.

Welding certificates.

D.

Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."

B.

Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.

1.7

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

1.8

Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with gratings by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

3510.00

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FERROUS METALS A.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B.

Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.

C.

Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

D.

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating.

2.2

FASTENERS A.

Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

B.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1.

Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

C.

Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).

D.

Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).

E.

Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.3

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy that is welded.

B.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

3510.00

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.4

2017

FABRICATION A.

Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B.

Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C.

Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

D.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

E.

Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. 2. 3.

F.

2.5

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. METAL BAR GRATINGS

A.

Welded Steel Grating: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports. 1.

2.

3510.00

Bearing Bar Spacing, Depth and Thickness: As shown on drawings. Traffic Surface: Plain. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq. ft. (550 g/sq. m) of coated surface.

Provide no fewer than four saddle clips for each grating section composed of rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) or less in thickness and spaced 15/16 inch (24 mm) or more o.c., with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over two bearing bars. Furnish galvanized malleable-iron flange clamp with galvanized bolt for securing grating to supports. Furnish as a system designed to be installed from above grating by one person. BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION C. 2.6

2017

Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. STEEL FINISHES

A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

C.

Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1.

E.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately.

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.2

2017

INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A.

General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

B.

Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown.

C.

Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.

3.3

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.

B.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 05 5313

3510.00

BAR GRATINGS

05 5313 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 06 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.3

Wood blocking and nailers. Plywood backing panels.

DEFINITIONS A.

Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension.

B.

Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.4

NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. 2.

3510.00

Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3. 4.

1.5

2017

For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.6

Fire-retardant-treated wood. Power-driven fasteners. Post-installed anchors. Metal framing anchors.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.7

Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.

Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B. 2.2

2017

Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A.

General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B.

Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flamespread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where hightemperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.

C.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

D.

Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece, or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

E.

For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F.

Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Framing for raised platforms. Concealed blocking. Roof framing and blocking.

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 4. 5. 2.3

2017

Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing. Plywood backing panels.

MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A.

General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2.

B.

Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2, Standard, or Stud grade lumber of any of the following species: 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Hem-fir (north); NLGA. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.

Utility Shelving: Lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades: 1. 2. 3.

D.

Blocking. Nailers.

Mixed southern pine or southern pine No. 1 or No. 2 grade; SPIB. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades: 1. 2. 3.

Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

E.

For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

F.

For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

G.

For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

3510.00

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.4

2017

PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.

2.5

Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. FASTENERS

A.

General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1.

Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C.

Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 and ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

D.

Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

E.

Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193, or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. 2.

Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

3510.00

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

C.

Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D.

Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

E.

Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1.

G.

Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. 2.

3. 4.

Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.

H.

Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

I.

Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. 2.

J.

3510.00

Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION K.

Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2. 3.

L.

3.2

2017

Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A.

Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B.

Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3

PROTECTION A.

Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B.

Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION 06 1053

3510.00

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 06 1600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2.

1.3

Wall sheathing. Parapet sheathing. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.

Section 06 1053 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. Section 07 2500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3510.00

Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

SHEATHING

06 1600 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.4

2017

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1.

1.5

Fire-retardant-treated plywood.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.6

Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Protect the edges of panels, especially tongue-and-groove panels. Place panels to be moved by forklift on pallets or bunks when received to avoid damage by fork tines.

B.

Panels to be transported on open truck beds should be covered with standard tarpaulins or "lumber wraps."

C.

Whenever possible, store panels under a roof, especially if they will not be used soon after received. Keep sanded and other appearance grades away from open doorways, and weight down the top panel in a stack to help avoid any possible warpage from humidity. If moisture absorption is expected, cut steel banding on panel bundles to prevent edge damage.

D.

Panels to be stored outside should be stacked on a level platform supported by 4x4 stringers or other blocking. Never leave panels or the platform in direct contact with the ground. Use at least three full-width supports along the 8-foot length of the panel – one centered and the others 12 to 16 inches from each end.

E.

Cover the stack loosely with plastic sheets or tarps. Anchor the coverings at the top of the stack, but keep it open and away from the sides and bottom to assure good ventilation. Tight coverings prevent air circulation and, when exposed to sunlight, create a "greenhouse" effect which may encourage mold formation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

3510.00

Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

SHEATHING

06 1600 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

2.2

2017

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A.

Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. APA performance category shall be equal to the nominal panel thickness.

B.

Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.3

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A.

General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B.

Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201/D 3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F (76 deg C) shall be not less than span ratings specified.

C.

Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D.

Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E.

Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1.

3510.00

Parapet sheathing. SHEATHING

06 1600 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.4

2017

WALL SHEATHING A.

Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 2.5

CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; Dens-Glass Gold. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond EXP Extended Exposure Sheathing. United States Gypsum Company; Securock.

Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) for vertical installation.

PARAPET SHEATHING A.

Plywood Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. 2.

2.6

Span Rating: Not less than32/16. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm).

FASTENERS A.

General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1.

For parapet and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C.

Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D.

Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Wood Framing: ASTM C 1002.

E.

Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F.

Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. 1.

3510.00

For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002.

SHEATHING

06 1600 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.

2.7

2017

For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954.

SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A.

Sealant for Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutralcuring silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B.

Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. 2.

Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D.

Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E.

Coordinate walland parapet sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F.

Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G.

Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3510.00

SHEATHING

06 1600 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.2

2017

WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A.

General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B.

Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: a. b.

3.3

Wall and Parapet Sheathing Screw to cold-formed metal framing.

Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.

GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A.

Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. Install panels with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. Install panels with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B.

Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C.

Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. 2.

D.

Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. 2.

E.

Space fasteners approximately 7 inches (175 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of panels. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

3510.00

Space fasteners approximately 7 inches (175 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of panels. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. SHEATHING

06 1600 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

END OF SECTION 06 1600

3510.00

SHEATHING

06 1600 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 1416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Polyurethane waterproofing.

Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation." for insulation drainage panels.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2.

B.

Shop Drawings: 1. 2.

1.4

Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate.

Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For Installer.

B.

Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

3510.00

COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07 1416 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.5

2017

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.6

Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer. FIELD CONDITIONS

A.

Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. 2.

B. 1.7

Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period.

Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. WARRANTY

A.

Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING A.

Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. b. c.

2.2

BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterSeal HLM 5000. Tremco Incorporated; TREMproof 201/60. United Coatings; Elastall 1000.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with one another and with waterproofing. 1.

3510.00

Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07 1416 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated acrylic latex, polyurethane, or epoxy..

C.

Sheet Flashing: 50-mil-(1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene. 1.

Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.

D.

Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

E.

Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing; ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25 or greater; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications;; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions. 1.

2.3

Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.

PROTECTION COURSE A.

Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforcedasphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.

2. 3.

2.4

Henry Company; Asphalt Protection Board. Soprema, Inc; Sopraboard. W.R. Meadows, Inc; Protection Course.

Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) nominal. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS A.

Insulation Drainage Panels, General: Comply with Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.

3510.00

Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07 1416 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.

B. 3.2

2017

Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION

A.

Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B.

Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C.

Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D.

Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

3.3

PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS, PENETRATIONS, AND CORNERS A.

Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B.

Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.4

JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A.

Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. 2. 3.

B.

3510.00

Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. Apply bond breaker on sealant surface, beneath preparation strip. Prime substrate along each side of joint and apply a single thickness of preparation strip at least 6 inches (150 mm) wide along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07 1416 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

3.5

2017

Extend sheet flashings for 4 inches (100 mm onto perpendicular surfaces and items penetrating substrate.

WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A.

Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B.

Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.

C.

Apply primer over prepared substrate unless otherwise instructed in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

D.

Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. 1. 2. 3.

Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of [90 mils (2.25 mm) Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. Verify manufacturer's recommended wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).

E.

Cure waterproofing, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application and curing.

F.

Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing before starting subsequent construction operations. 1.

3.6

For vertical applications, set protection course in nominally cured membrane, which will act as an adhesive. If membrane cures before application of protection course, use adhesive.

PROTECTION A.

Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B.

Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C.

Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

D.

Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

3510.00

COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07 1416 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

END OF SECTION 07 1416

3510.00

COLD-FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07 1416 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 1900 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces: 1.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Clay brick masonry.

Section 04 2113 "Brick Masonry" for face brick masonry assemblies.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For qualified Applicator.

B.

Product Certificates: For each type of water repellent, from manufacturer.

C.

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Applicator Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1.

3510.00

Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies. WATER REPELLENTS

07 1900 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.6

2017

Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for 24 hours. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. Not less than 24 hours seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in "Performance Requirements" Article within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A.

Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. 1.

Products: following: a. b. c. d. e.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

Degussa Corporation; Protectosil Aqua-Trete EM. Pecora Corporation; KlereSeal 920-W. PROSOCO, Inc.; Siloxane WB Concentrate. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikagard 701W. Symons by Dayton Superior; Siloxane/Silane 10%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.

3510.00

Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer.

WATER REPELLENTS

07 1900 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2. 3. 4.

2017

Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.

B.

Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica-containing or siliceous minerals.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.

C.

Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1.

3.3

Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required.

APPLICATION A.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used.

B.

Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using 15 psi- pressure spray with a fan-type spray nozzle to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform, overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.

3510.00

WATER REPELLENTS

07 1900 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.4

2017

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing of Water-Repellent Material: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when water repellent is being applied: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. 1. 2.

3.5

Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample waterrepellent material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of water-repellent material with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying water repellents if test results show material being used does not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying material from Project site, pay for testing, and correct deficiency of surfaces treated with rejected materials, as approved by Architect.

Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested. Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage.

CLEANING A.

Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

END OF SECTION 07 1900

3510.00

WATER REPELLENTS

07 1900 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2.

1.3

Section 04 2200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls. Section 07 5419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

B.

Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.6

Foam-plastic board insulation. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. Vapor retarders.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

3510.00

THERMAL INSULATION

07 2100 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

A.

Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B.

Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A.

Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.

2. B.

Type IV, 25 psi.

Extruded-Polystyrene Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. b. c.

C.

3510.00

DiversiFoam Products. Dow Chemical Company (The). Owens Corning.

DiversiFoam Products. Dow Chemical Company (The). Pactiv Building Products.

Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

THERMAL INSULATION

07 2100 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION D.

2.2

2017

Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

CertainTeed Corporation. Johns Manville. Knauf Insulation. Owens Corning.

B.

Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C.

Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.

D.

Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1. 2.

2.3

Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.

B.

Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

C.

Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

D.

Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.

E.

Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

3510.00

THERMAL INSULATION

07 2100 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.4

2017

INSULATION FASTENERS A.

Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2.

Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

3.

Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

3.2

3.3

Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B.

Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C.

Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D.

Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

3510.00

THERMAL INSULATION

07 2100 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION A.

3.4

2017

On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units loosely laid according to manufacturer's written instructions. INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A.

Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 1.

3.5

Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 2113 "Brick Masonry."

INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A.

Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B.

Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C.

Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

3510.00

THERMAL INSULATION

07 2100 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.6

INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A.

3.7

Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1.

Butt panels together for tight fit.

2.

Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

3.

After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4.

Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.

INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B.

Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1.

2.

3.8

2017

Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vaporretarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

C.

Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

D.

Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. PROTECTION

3510.00

THERMAL INSULATION

07 2100 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION A.

2017

Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION 07 2100

3510.00

THERMAL INSULATION

07 2100 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 2500 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes:

B.

Building wrap Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product. 1.

1.4

For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER (For use in exterior wall sheathing) A.

Building Paper: Water-vapor-permeable, asphalt-saturated kraft building paper that complies with ICC-ES AC38, Grade D.

B.

Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

3510.00

Products Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

WEATHER BARRIERS

07 2500 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. b. c. 2. 3. C.

2.2

2017

Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek HomeWrap. Ludlow Coated Products; Air Stop Housewrap.

Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 75 perms (4300 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.

Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A.

Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed.

B.

Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. 2.

C.

Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated.

Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.

Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

END OF SECTION 07 2500

3510.00

WEATHER BARRIERS

07 2500 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

SECTION 07 5419 – POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SECTION INCLUDES A. Duro-Last® PVC thermoplastic membrane attached with mechanical fasteners. B. DensDeck® Prime Roof Board, attached with mechanical fasteners. C. Duro-Guard® ISO II (tapered), attached with mechanical fasteners. D. DensDeck® Prime Roof Board, attached with mechanical fasteners. E. Prefabricated flashings, corners, parapets, stacks, vents, and related details. F. Fasteners, adhesives, and other accessories required for a complete roofing installation. G. Traffic Protection.

1.2

REFERENCES A. NRCA - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads For Buildings And Other Structures. C. UL - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory, Roofing Systems (TGFU.R10128). D. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. E. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics. F. ASTM D 4434 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing. G. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. H. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

1.3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Physical Properties: 1. Roof product must meet the requirements of Type III PVC sheet roofing as defined by

3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

ASTM D 4434 and must meet or exceed the following physical properties. 2. Thickness: 50 mil, nominal, in accordance with ASTM D 751. 3. Thickness Over Scrim: ≥ 28 mil in accordance with ASTM D 751. 4. Breaking Strengths: ≥ 390 lbf. (MD) and ≥ 438 lbf. (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method. 5. Elongation at Break: ≥ 31% (MD) and ≥ 31% (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method. 6. Heat Aging in accordance with ASTM D 3045: 176 °F for 56 days. No sign of cracking, chipping or crazing. (In accordance with ASTM D 4434). 7. Factory Seam Strength: ≥ 417 lbf. in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method. 8. Tearing Strength: ≥ 132 lbf. (MD) and ≥ 163 lbf. (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D 751, Procedure B. 9. Low Temperature Bend (Flexibility): Pass at -40 °F in accordance with ASTM D 2136. 10. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion or chalking after 5,000 hours in accordance with ASTM G 154. 11. Linear Dimensional Change: < 0.5% in accordance with ASTM D 1204 at 176 ± 2 °F for 6 hours. 12. Water Absorption: < 1.7% in accordance with ASTM D 570 at 158 °F for 166 hours. 13. Static Puncture Resistance: ≥ 56 lbs. in accordance with ASTM D 5602. 14. Dynamic Puncture Resistance: ≥ 14.7 ft-lbf. in accordance with ASTM D 5635. D. Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC): 1. Membrane must be listed on CRRC website. a.

Initial Solar Reflectance: ≥ 39%

b.

Initial Thermal Emittance: ≥ 89%

c.

Initial Solar Reflective Index (SRI): ≥ 43

d.

3-Year Aged Solar Reflectance: ≥ 33%

e.

3-Year Aged Thermal Emittance: ≥ 89%

f.

3-Year Aged Solar Reflective Index (SRI): ≥ 35

E. Insulation 1. Provide overall thermal resistance for roofing system as follows: a. Minimum Thickness: 3.5 inch. 2. Tapered Insulation Slope: 1/4 inch per foot. 3. Configuration as indicated on the Drawings. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000. B. Duro-Last data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate insulation pattern, overall membrane layout, field seam locations, joint or termination detail conditions, and location of fasteners. D. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples, representing actual product, color, and finish. 1. 4 inch by 6 inch sample of roofing membrane, of color specified. 2. 4 inch by 6 inch sample of walkway pad. 3. Termination bar, fascia bar with cover, drip edge and gravel stop if to be used. 4. Each fastener type to be used for installing membrane, insulation/recover board, termination bar and edge details. E. Installer Certification: Certification from the roofing system manufacturer that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. F. Manufacturer's warranties. 1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer specializing in the production of PVC membranes systems and utilizing a Quality Control Manual during the production of the membrane roofing system that has been approved by and is inspected by Underwriters Laboratories. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of roofing systems similar to those specified in this project and approved by the roofing system manufacturer. D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane manufacturer. E. There shall be no deviations from the roof membrane manufacturer's specifications or the approved shop drawings without the prior written approval of the manufacturer.

1.6

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly wind uplift and fire hazard requirements.

3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

B. Fire Exposure: Provide membrane roofing materials with the following fire-test-response characteristics. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: a. Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119 for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. 3. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. C. Wind Uplift: 1. Roofing System Design: Provide a roofing system designed to resist uplift pressures calculated according to the current edition of the ASCE-7 Specification Minimum Design Loads for Buildings And Other Structures. 1.7

PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section. B. Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

1.8

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and

3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Store roof materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. E. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.9

WARRANTY A. Contractor's Warranty: The contractor shall warrant the roof application with respect to workmanship and proper application for two (2) years from the effective date of the warranty issued by the manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Must provide for completion of repairs, replacement of membrane or total replacement of the roofing system at the then-current material and labor prices throughout the life of the warranty. In addition the warranty must meet the following criteria: 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date issued by the manufacturer. 2.

Coverage to maximum wind speed of 75 mph.

3.

No exclusion for damage caused by ponding water.

4.

No exclusion for damage caused by biological growth.

5.

Issued direct from and serviced by the roof membrane manufacturer.

6.

Transferable for the full term of the warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Duro-Last Roofing, Inc., which is located at: 525 Morley Drive, Saginaw, MI 48601. Telephone: 800-248-0280. B. All roofing system components to be provided or approved by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. C. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.2

ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Roofing Membrane: Duro-Last® PVC thermoplastic membrane conforming to ASTM D

3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

4434, type III, fabric-reinforced, PVC, NSF/ANSI 347 Gold or Platinum Certification, and a product-specific third-party verified Environmental Product Declaration. Membrane properties as follows: 1. Thickness: a. 50 mil. 2. Exposed Face Color: a. Tan. 3. Minimum recycle content 7% post-industrial and 0% post-consumer. 4. Recycled at end of life into resilient flooring or concrete expansion joints. B. Accessory Materials: Provide accessory materials supplied by or approved for use by DuroLast Roofing, Inc. 1. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard reinforced PVC sheet flashing. 2. Duro-Last Factory Prefabricated Flashings: manufactured using Manufacturer's standard reinforced PVCmembrane. a. Stack Flashings. b. Curb Flashings. c. Inside and Outside Corners. d. Drain Boots, Composite Drain Rings (CDR) and Dome Strainers. e. Membrane Scupper Liners. 3. Sealants and Adhesives: Compatible with roofing system and supplied by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. a. Duro-Caulk® Plus. b. Strip Mastic. 4. Slip Sheet: Compatible with roofing system and supplied by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. 5. Fasteners and Plates: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane and insulation to substrate. Supplied by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. a. Concrete Screws. b. Cleat Plates. c. 3 inch Metal Plates. 6. PV Anchors 7. Termination and Edge Details: Supplied by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. a. Termination Bar. b. Flat Coping. c. Snap Coping. 8. Vinyl Coated Metal: Supplied by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. 24 gauge, hot-dipped 3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

galvanized, grade 90 metal with a minimum of 17 mil of Duro-Last membrane laminated to one side. 9. Two-Way Roof Vents: Supplied by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. Install a minimum of 1 vent for each 1,000 ft² (93 m²) of roof area. C. Walkways: 1. Provide non-skid, maintenance-free walkway pads in areas of heavy foot traffic and around mechanical equipment. a. Duro-Last Roof Trak® III Walkway Pad. 2.3

ROOF INSULATION A. General: 1. Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, as selected from manufacturer's standard sizes. 2. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Complying with ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glassfiber mat facer on both major surfaces. Material as supplied by Duro-Last. 1.

2.4

Duro-Guard® ISO II (tapered).

ROOF INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide roof insulation accessories approved by the roof membrane manufacturer and as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the intended use. B. Fasteners: Provide Duro-Last factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening insulation and/or insulation cover boards in conformance to specified design requirements. C. Insulation Cover Board: 1. Glass-mat-faced, water-resistant gypsum substrate conforming to ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, DensDeck® Prime Roof Board as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Corporation. a. ½ inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A. Verify that the surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that the deck is supported and secured. C. Verify that the deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, and

3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

properly sloped to drains, valleys, eaves, scuppers or gutters. D. Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of standing water, ice or snow. E. Verify that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are solidly set. F. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another contractor, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2

PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, free of fins, sharp edges, loose and foreign material, oil, grease, and bitumen.

3.3

INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with the roof manufacturer's requirements. B. Separation Board: DensDeck® Prime Roof Board. 1. Use only fasteners, stress plates and fastening patterns accepted for use by the roof manufacturer. Fastening patterns must meet applicable design requirements. a. Install fasteners in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements. Fasteners that are improperly installed must be replaced or corrected. b. Attach boards in parallel courses with end joints staggered 50% and adjacent boards butted together with no gaps greater than ¼ inch. C. Insulation: Duro-Guard® ISO II (tapered). 1. Install insulation in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Insulation shall be adequately supported to sustain normal foot traffic without damage. 3.

Where field trimmed, insulation shall be fitted tightly around roof protrusions with no gaps greater than ¼ inch.

4. Tapered insulation boards shall be installed in accordance with the insulation manufacture’s shop drawings. 5. No more insulation shall be applied than can be covered with the roof membrane by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. 6. If more than one layer of insulation is used, all joints between subsequent layers shall be offset by at least 6 inches. 7.

3510.00

Mechanical Attachment: Use only fasteners, stress plates and fastening patterns accepted for use by the roof manufacturer. Fastening patterns must meet applicable design requirements.

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

a. Install fasteners in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements. Fasteners that are improperly installed must be replaced or corrected. 8. Mechanically attach Duro-Guard® ISO II (tapered) insulation boards in parallel courses with end joints staggered 50% and adjacent boards butted together with no gaps greater than ¼ inch. D. Insulation Cover Board: DensDeck® Prime Roof Board. 1. Use only fasteners, stress plates and fastening patterns accepted for use by the roof manufacturer. Fastening patterns must meet applicable design requirements. a. Install fasteners in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements. Fasteners that are improperly installed must be replaced or corrected. b. Attach boards in parallel courses with end joints staggered 50% and adjacent boards butted together with no gaps greater than ¼ inch. E. Roof Membrane: 50 mil, Duro-Last® PVC thermoplastic membrane. 1. Use only fasteners, stress plates and fastening patterns accepted for use by the roof manufacturer. Fastening patterns must meet the applicable design requirements. 2. Install fasteners in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements. Fasteners that are improperly installed shall be replaced or corrected. 3. Mechanically fasten membrane to the structural deck utilizing fasteners and fastening patterns that in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s requirements. 4. Cut membrane to fit neatly around all penetrations and roof projections. 5. Unroll roofing membrane and positioned with a minimum 6 inch overlap. F. Seaming: 1. Weld overlapping sheets together using hot air. Minimum weld width is 1-1/2 inches. 2. Check field welded seams for continuity and integrity and repair all imperfections by the end of each work day. G. Membrane Termination/Securement: All membrane terminations shall be completed in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. 1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition. 2. Provide securement at any angle change where the slope or combined slopes exceeds two inches in one horizontal foot. H. Flashings: Complete all flashings and terminations as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. 1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition. a. Do not apply flashing over existing thru-wall flashings or weep holes. 3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

b. Secure flashing on a vertical surface before the seam between the flashing and the main roof sheet is completed. c. Extend flashing membrane a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) onto the main roof sheet beyond the mechanical securement. d. Use care to ensure that the flashing does not bridge locations where there is a change in direction (e.g. where the parapet meets the roof deck). 2. Penetrations: a. Flash all pipes, supports, soil stacks, cold vents, and other penetrations passing through the roofing membrane as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. b. Utilize custom prefabricated flashings supplied by the membrane manufacturer. c. Existing Flashings: Remove when necessary to allow new flashing to terminate directly to the penetration. 3. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shapes: a. Clusters of pipes or other penetrations which cannot be sealed with prefabricated membrane flashings shall be sealed by surrounding them with a prefabricated vinylcoated metal pitch pan and sealant supplied by the membrane manufacturer. b. Vinyl-coated metal pitch pans shall be installed, flashed and filled with sealant in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. c. Pitch pans shall not be used where prefabricated or field fabricated flashings are possible. I. Roof Drains: 1. Coordinate installation of roof drains and vents specified in Section 15146 - Plumbing Specialties. 2. Remove existing flashing and asphalt at existing drains in preparation for sealant and membrane. 3. Provide a smooth clean surface on the mating surface between the clamping ring and the drain base. J. Edge Details: 1. Provide edge details as indicated on the Drawings. Install in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Join individual sections in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. 3. Coordinate installation of metal flashing and counter flashing specified in Section 07620. 4. Manufactured Roof Specialties: Coordinate installation of copings, counter flashing systems, gutters, downspouts, and roof expansion assemblies specified in Section 07710. K. Walkways: 1. Install walkways in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Provide walkways where indicated on the Drawings. 3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

 

3. Install walkway pads at roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders and all other traffic concentration points regardless of traffic frequency. Provided in areas receiving regular traffic to service rooftop units or where a passageway over the surface is required. 4. Do not install walkways over flashings or field seams until manufacturer’s warranty inspection has been completed. L. Water cut-offs: 1. Provide water cut-offs on a daily basis at the completion of work and at the onset of inclement weather. 2. Provide water cut-offs to ensure that water does not flow beneath the completed sections of the new roofing system. 3. Remove water cut-offs prior to the resumption of work. 4. The integrity of the water cut-off is the sole responsibility of the roofing contractor. 5. Any membrane contaminated by the cut-off material shall be cleaned or removed. 3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The membrane manufacturer’s representative shall provide a comprehensive final inspection after completion of the roof system. All application errors shall be addressed and final punch list completed.

3.5

PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing products from construction operations until completion of project. B. Where traffic is anticipated over completed roofing membrane, protect from damage using durable materials that are compatible with membrane. C. Repair or replace damaged products after work is completed.

END OF SECTION 07 5419

3510.00

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING

07 5419 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. Section 07 5419 “Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing” for sheet metal flashing integral with roofing. Section 07 9500 "Expansion Control" for manufactured sheet metal expansion-joint covers.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B.

Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product. 1.

B.

Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.

3510.00

Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. C.

1.5

2017

Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. Include details of termination points and assemblies. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. Include details of special conditions. Include details of connections to adjoining work. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10).

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. 1.6

Qualification Data: For fabricator. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A.

1.7

Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

1.8

Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B.

Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

3510.00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B.

Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C.

Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

D.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttimesky heat loss. 1.

2.2

Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

SHEET METALS A.

General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B.

Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper. 1.

C.

Nonpatinated Exposed Finish: Mill.

Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. 1.

Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.

2. 3510.00

Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

Color: Custom Color to match existing. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.

D.

Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil(0.013 mm).

Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. 2.

Surface: Smooth, flat. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.

3. 4.

2.3

2017

Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

Color: Match storefront frame color. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1.

General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. b. c.

2. 3. 4.

3510.00

Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or passivated Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION C.

2017

Solder: 1.

For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.

D.

Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E.

Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethanepolymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

2.4

FABRICATION, GENERAL A.

General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B.

Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C.

Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

D.

Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E.

Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F.

Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

3510.00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

G.

Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

H.

Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.5

ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.

Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-(2400-mm-)long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Gutter Profile: Style K according to cited sheet metal standard. Expansion Joints: Lap type. Accessories: Wire-ball downspout strainer. Gutters with Girth up to 15 inches(380 mm): Fabricate from the following materials: a.

B.

Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop fabricate elbows. Fabricated Hanger Style: Fig 1-35A according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1.

Fabricate from the following materials: a.

2.6

Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm)thick.

LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.

Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-(2400mm-)long, but not exceeding 12-foot-(3.6-m-)long sections. Furnish with 6-inch-(150-mm) wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. 2.

Joint Style: Overlapped, 4 inches (100 mm) wide. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a.

B.

3510.00

Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.

Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-(2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot-(3.6m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, solder or weld watertight.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3.

Coping Profile: As indicated on the drawings. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch-(150-mm-) wide, exposed cover plate. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a.

C.

Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)

Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

2.7

Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

G.

Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

F.

Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

E.

Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

D.

2017

Copper: 12 oz./sq. ft. (0.41 mm thick)

WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.

Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum96-inch-(2400-mm) long, but not exceeding 12-foot-(3.6-m-)long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch-(50-mm-)high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

B.

Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2inch-(50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

2.8

Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.(0.55 mm thick)

Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.

Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.

3510.00

Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick) SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. 2. 3.

B. 3.2

Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1.

C.

3510.00

Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

2017

Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D.

Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

E.

Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F.

Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1.

2. G.

Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. 2. 3. 4.

H. 3.3

Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for copper.

Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.

B.

Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. 2.

C.

3510.00

Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat.

Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3. 3.4

2017

Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system using a cast iron boot.

ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A.

General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B.

Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C.

Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5

WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A.

General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B.

Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 04 2200 "Concrete Unit Masonry."

C.

Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.

3.6

MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A.

3510.00

Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.7

2017

ERECTION TOLERANCES A.

3.8

Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B.

Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C.

Clean off excess sealants.

D.

Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E.

Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 07 6200

3510.00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 7129 - MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2.

1.3

Bellows-type roof expansion joints.

Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wooden curbs or cants for mounting roof expansion joints. Section 07 5419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing" for roofing system. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated sheet metal expansion-joint systems, flashing, and other sheet metal items.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

Shop Drawings: For roof expansion joints. 1. 2. 3.

1.4

Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Include details of splices, intersections, transitions, fittings, method of field assembly, and location and size of each field splice. Provide isometric drawings of intersections, terminations, and changes in joint direction or planes, depicting how components interconnect with each other and adjacent construction to allow movement and achieve waterproof continuity.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

3510.00

Product Test Reports: For each fire-barrier provided as part of a roof-expansion-joint assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

07 7129 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

General: Roof expansion joints shall withstand exposure to weather, remain watertight, and resist the movements indicated without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1.

2.2

Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

BELLOWS-TYPE ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS A.

Source Limitations: Obtain bellows-type roof expansion joints approved by roofing manufacturer and that are part of roofing membrane warranty.

B.

Flanged Bellows Roof Expansion Joint: Manufactured, continuous, waterproof, joint-cover assembly, consisting of exposed membrane bellows, laminated to flexible, closed-cell support foam, and secured along each edge to a 3- to 4-inch-(76- to 100-mm-) wide metal flange for nailing to substrate. Provide each size and type indicated, splicing units, adhesives, and other components as recommended by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for complete installation. Fabricate each assembly specifically for installation configuration indicated on Drawings. 1.

Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Michael Rizza Company, a Division of Balco Inc, RW-2g and RW-6g or comparable products by one of the following: a. b.

2. 3. 4.

Joint Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent of joint. Joint Width: 2” and 6” inches. Bellows: Silicone flexible membrane, nominal 45 mils thick. a.

5.

3510.00

Color: Sandstone.

Flanges: Aluminum, 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. a.

6.

MM Systems Corporation. Nystrom Inc.

Form: Flat to fit cants as indicated on Drawings.

Cover Membrane: Silicone flexible membrane, factory laminated to bellows and covering entire joint assembly and curbs. MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

07 7129 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 7.

2.3

2017

Secondary Seal: Continuous, waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the primary bellows assembly.

MATERIALS A.

Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for sheet and plate, ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for extrusions; alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. 2. 3.

Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious or preservative-treated wood materials. Mill Finish: As manufactured. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

B.

Silicone Extrusions: ASTM D 2000, UV stabilized, and that does not propagate flame.

C.

Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads.

D.

Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Examine roof-joint openings, inside surfaces of parapets, and expansion-control joint systems that interface with roof expansion joints, for suitable conditions where roof expansion joints will be installed.

C.

Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

3510.00

General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling and installing roof expansion joints.

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

07 7129 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2017

Anchor roof expansion joints securely in place, with provisions for required movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and miscellaneous items as required to complete roof expansion joints. Install roof expansion joints true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. Provide for linear thermal expansion of roof expansion joint materials. Provide uniform profile of roof expansion joint throughout its length; do not stretch or squeeze membranes. Provide uniform, neat seams. Install roof expansion joints to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Torch cutting of roof expansion joints is not permitted. Do not use graphite pencils to mark aluminum surfaces.

B.

Directional Changes and Other Expansion-Control Joint Systems: Coordinate installation of roof expansion joints with other expansion-control joint systems to result in watertight performance. Install factory-fabricated units at directional changes and at transitions between roof expansion joints and exterior expansion-control joint systems specified in Section 07 9500 "Expansion Control" to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and watertight joints.

C.

Splices: Splice roof expansion joints with materials provided by roof-expansion-joint manufacturer for this purpose, to provide continuous, uninterrupted, and waterproof joints. 1.

D.

3.3

Install waterproof splices and prefabricated end dams to prevent leakage of secondary-seal membrane.

Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. PROTECTION

A.

Protect roof expansion joints from foot traffic, displacement, or other damage.

B.

Remove and replace roof expansion joints and components that become damaged by moisture or otherwise.

END OF SECTION 07 7129

3510.00

MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS

07 7129 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 8100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A. 1.3

Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM). PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

1.5

Product Data: For each type of product. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Qualification Data: For Installer.

B.

Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C.

Preconstruction Test Reports: For fireproofing.

D.

Field quality-control reports.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.7

Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements.

Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

3510.00

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8100 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION A.

1.8

2017

Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1.

Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

2.

Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

3.

Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing.

4.

Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

5.

For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or primers.

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 44 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B.

Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS, GENERAL A.

Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.

C.

Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

3510.00

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8100 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. D. 2.2

2017

Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A.

SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application. 1.

3510.00

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.

Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.; AD Southwest Fireproofing Type 5GP.

b.

Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace Construction Products; Monokote MK6 Series.

c.

Isolatek International; Cafco 300.

2.

Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736.

3.

Density: Not less than 22 lb/cu. ft. and as specified in the approved fireresistance design, according to ASTM E 605.

4.

Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch.

5.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a.

Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.

b.

Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less.

6.

Compressive Strength: Minimum 10 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM E 761.

7.

Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937.

8.

Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759.

9.

Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours according to ASTM E 859.

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8100 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.3

2017

AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B.

Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1.

Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

2.

Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3.

Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B.

Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

C.

Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

D.

Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

E.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

3510.00

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8100 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

C.

Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D.

For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3

APPLICATION A.

Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B.

Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C.

Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1.

Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.

2.

Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D.

Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

E.

Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F.

Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

G.

Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

H.

Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

I.

Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.

3510.00

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8100 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

J.

Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

K.

Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1.

3.4

Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1.

Test and inspect as required by the “Ohio Building Code”, 1704.10.

B.

Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C.

Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. 3.5

1.

Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest.

2.

Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

Prepare test and inspection reports. CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A.

Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B.

Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C.

As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D.

Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

3510.00

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8100 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION E.

2017

Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.

END OF SECTION 07 8100

3510.00

APPLIED FIREPROOFING

07 8100 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 8446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

1.3

Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.

Related Sections: 1.

Mechanical Specifications for penetration firestopping in fire-resistance-rated walls and horizontal assemblies.

2.

Section 07 9500 "Expansion Control" for fire-resistive architectural joint systems.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: following requirements:

3510.00

Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

07 8446 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.

Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. b.

Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the following: 1)

1.6

2017

UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B.

Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B.

Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A.

Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B.

Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1.

3510.00

Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

07 8446 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

2.

Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join.

3.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer: a.

Specified Technologies Inc (STI).

C.

Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

D.

Low-Emitting Materials: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using SmallScale Environmental Chambers."

E.

Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

3510.00

Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1.

Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2.

Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

07 8446 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

3.3

2017

Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B.

Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1.

C.

3.4

After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1.

Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2.

Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.

3.

For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

CLEANING AND PROTECTING A.

Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.5

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A.

Refer to drawings for UL classified firestop systems accepted in the facility.

END OF SECTION 07 8446

3510.00

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

07 8446 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.3

Silicone joint sealants. Urethane joint sealants.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B.

Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. 2.

1.4

Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.5

Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. FIELD CONDITIONS

A.

Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3510.00

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

JOINT SEALANTS

07 9200 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A.

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B.

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2

SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A.

Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.

2.3

Pecora Corporation; 864NST. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 3. Down Corning Corporation: 799.

URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.

Urethane, S, NS, 50, T,NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, UseT, NT. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

2.4

Pecora Corporation; DynaTrol II Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic 100.

JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A.

Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of

3510.00

JOINT SEALANTS

07 9200 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C.

2.5

Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealantsubstrate tests and field tests.

B.

Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C.

Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1.

2. 3510.00

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of JOINT SEALANTS

07 9200 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. b. 3. 4.

Concrete. Masonry.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a.

Metal.

B.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.

General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C.

Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials.

D.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1.

3510.00

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS

07 9200 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2. 3. F.

Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2.

3.4

2017

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

CLEANING A.

3.5

Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION

A.

Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 07 9200

3510.00

JOINT SEALANTS

07 9200 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 07 9500 - EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2.

1.3

Interior expansion control systems. Exterior wall expansion control systems.

Section 07 7129 "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints" for factory-fabricated roof expansion control. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for liquid-applied joint sealants and for elastomeric sealants without metal frames.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of each expansion control system. Where expansion control systems change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.

B.

Product Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3510.00

Manufacturer and model number for each expansion control system. Expansion control system location cross-referenced to Drawings. Nominal joint width. Movement capability. Classification as thermal or seismic. Materials, colors, and finishes. Product options.

EXPANSION CONTROL

07 9500 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.4

2017

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Product Test Reports: For each fire barrier provided as part of an expansion control system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. 1. 2.

B.

2.2

Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion control systems.

Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall expansion control systems with roof expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion joint assemblies are specified elsewhere. INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

MM Systems Corporation Construction Specialties Nystrom Inc. Watson Bowman Acme Balco Inc.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer.

C.

Floor-to-Floor (XFF-01): 1.

Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems, XPD-2-1

2.

Design Criteria: a. b.

3510.00

Nominal Joint Width: 2 inches. Minimum Joint Width: 1 inch. EXPANSION CONTROL

07 9500 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION c.

Maximum Joint Width:3 inches. 1) 2) 3)

Type: Cover plate - recessed.

4.

Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard.

1.

Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems, HDLE-2-1

2.

Design Criteria: Nominal Joint Width: 2 inches. Minimum Joint Width: 1inch Maximum Joint Width: 2 inches.

3.

Type: Cover plate - recessed.

4.

Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1)

1.

Basis-of-Design Product: MM Systems, X-N-2_STUD

2.

Design Criteria: Nominal Joint Width: 2 inches. Minimum Joint Width: 1.5 inches. Maximum Joint Width: 3.5 inches.

3.

Type: Cover plate surface mounted.

4.

Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1)

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Wall-to-Wall (XWW-02): 1. 2.

3510.00

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Wall-to-Wall (XWW-01):

a. b. c.

F.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Floor-to-Wall (XFW-01):

a. b. c.

E.

Uniform Load150 lb/sq. ft. (732 kg/sq. m) Concentrated Load: 2000 lb (907 kg) Maximum Deflection: 0.5 inch (13 mm

3.

1) D.

2017

Basis of Design Product: MM Systems, SCE-250 Series Design Criteria: EXPANSION CONTROL

07 9500 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. b. c.

Nominal Joint Width: 2 inches. Minimum Joint Width: 1 inch. Maximum Joint Width: 3 inches.

3.

Type: Preformed cellular foam.

4.

Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1)

2.3

2017

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

MM Systems Corporation Construction Specialties Nystrom Inc. Watson Bowman Acme Balco Inc.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single manufacturer.

C.

Wall-to-Wall (TXWW-01) 1.

Basis of Design Product: MM Systems, SIF-200 Series

2.

Design Criteria: a. b. c.

Nominal Joint Width: 2 inches. Minimum Joint Width: 1 inch. Maximum Joint Width: 3 inches.

3.

Type: Preformed cellular foam.

4.

Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1)

D.

Wall-to-Wall (TXWW-02) 1.

Basis of Design Product: MM Systems, SIF-600 Series

2.

Design Criteria: a. b.

3510.00

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Nominal Joint Width: 6 inches. Minimum Joint Width: 3 inch. EXPANSION CONTROL

07 9500 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION c.

Maximum Joint Width: 9 inches.

3.

Type: Preformed cellular foam.

4.

Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1)

E.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

Roof Parapet to Roof Parapet (TXRR-01): 1.

Basis of Design Product: MM Systems, RXH-6-6

2.

Design Criteria: a. b. c.

Nominal Joint Width: 6 inches. Minimum Joint Width: 4.5 inch. Maximum Joint Width: 7.5 inches.

3.

Type: Cover Plate

4.

Seal Material: Manufacturer's standard. 1)

2.4

2017

Color: Custom Paint Color, Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000 to match coping.

ACCESSORIES A.

Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard moisture barrier consisting of a continuous, waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the primary cover. 1.

2.5

Drain-Tube Assemblies: Equip moisture barrier with drain tubes and seals to direct collected moisture to drainto exterior-wall expansion control system

MATERIALS A.

Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. 1.

Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.

B.

Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under compression.

C.

Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.

3510.00

EXPANSION CONTROL

07 9500 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.6

2017

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C.

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine surfaces where expansion control systems will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1.

3.2

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION A.

Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion control systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion control systems.

3.3

INSTALLATION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B.

Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control systems. 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. EXPANSION CONTROL

07 9500 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 4. 5.

Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic, shrinkage-resistant grout. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. a.

6.

2017

Shimming is not permitted.

Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) from each end and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

C.

Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer.

D.

Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices.

3.4

PROTECTION A.

Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary protection over expansion control systems. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial Completion of the Work.

END OF SECTION 07 9500

3510.00

EXPANSION CONTROL

07 9500 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes hollow-metal work.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. COORDINATION

A.

1.5

Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. ACTION SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product. 1.

B.

Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings and finishes.

Elevations of each door type. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C.

1.6

2017

Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of each different wall opening condition. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

1.7

Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1.

Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B.

Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C.

Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-(102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

3510.00

Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY Republic Doors and Frames Steelcraft; an Allegion brand

Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.2

2017

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.

2.3

Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A.

Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B.

Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. 2.

Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. Doors: a. b. c. d. e.

3.

Frames: a. b.

4. 2.4

Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (16 gauge, 1.3 mm). Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). Construction: Face welded.

Exposed Finish: Prime.

EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A.

Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B.

Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. 2.

Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. Doors: a.

3510.00

Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION b. c. d. e. f.

Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm.) Face: Metallic hot-dipped zinc coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (16 gauge 1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. Core: Mineral board. 1)

3.

b.

2.5

Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

Frames: a.

4.

2017

Materials: Metallic hot-dipped zinc coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. Construction: Face welded.

Exposed Finish: Prime.

FRAME ANCHORS A.

2.6

Jamb Anchors: 1.

Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than0.042 inch(1.0 mm)thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than2 inches(51 mm)wide by10 inches(254 mm)long; or wire anchors not less than0.177 inch(4.5 mm)thick.

2.

Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3.

Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8inch-(9.5-mm-)diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

MATERIALS A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B.

Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

3510.00

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION C.

2017

Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.

For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D.

Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E.

Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

F.

Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.7

FABRICATION A.

Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B.

Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

C.

3510.00

Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51 mm). Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch(19 mm)beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3. 4.

Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a.

Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4)

b.

c.

Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. Three anchors per jamb from60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. Four anchors per jamb from90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above120 inches(3048 mm)high.

Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4)

5.

2017

Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. b.

Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D.

Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E.

Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1.

3510.00

Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2. F.

Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1.

2.8

2017

Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.

STEEL FINISHES A.

Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1.

2.9

Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

ACCESSORIES A.

Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B.

Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C.

Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

3510.00

Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

3.3

2017

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1.

Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b.

c. d. e. f. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. b. c. d.

C.

3510.00

At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. b. c. d.

2. 3.4

2017

Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B.

Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C.

Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

END OF SECTION 08 1113

3510.00

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 08 7100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. 2.

B.

Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. 2.

3510.00

Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

E.

Mechanical door hardware. Electromechanical door hardware. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

Related Sections: 1. 2.

D.

Swinging doors. Other doors to the extent indicated.

ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.3

2017

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B.

Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1.

Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2.

Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3.

Content: Include the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

4.

C.

Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1.

3510.00

Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. Manufacturer of each item. Fastenings and other pertinent information. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. Mounting locations for door hardware. Door and frame sizes and materials. Warranty information for each product.

Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a.

b. c.

2.

2017

Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.

Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D.

Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E.

Informational Submittals: 1.

F.

1.4

Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B.

Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C.

Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION D.

2017

Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

F.

Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

G.

Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. H.

1.5

Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. Requirements for key control storage and software. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

3510.00

Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

B.

Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C.

Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6

COORDINATION A.

Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B.

Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C.

Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional infield modifications.

1.7

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. Faulty operation of the hardware. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C.

Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Special Warranty Periods:

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.8

2017

Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. Five years for exit hardware. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.

Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A.

General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B.

Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C.

Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D.

Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2

HANGING DEVICES A.

Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1.

Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. b. c.

3510.00

Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION d.

2.

b.

Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

2.3

Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings: a.

5.

Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a.

4.

For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. b.

3.

2017

Hager Companies (HA). McKinney Products (MK). Stanley Hardware (ST).

POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A.

Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

B.

3510.00

Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option. Stanley Hardware (ST) – C Option.

Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1.

Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney Products (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003.

2.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b.

2.4

McKinney Products (MK) – QC-C Series. Stanley Hardware (ST) – WH Series.

DOOR OPERATING TRIM A.

Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

B.

Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in hardware sets. 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

2.5

Burns Manufacturing (BU). Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). Trimco (TC).

Burns Manufacturing (BU). Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). Trimco (TC).

CYLINDERS AND KEYING A.

3510.00

General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b.

C.

3. 4. 5.

Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.

Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. 2. 3.

F.

Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. Keyway: New I/C core system keyed to existing Facility standard.

Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1.

E.

Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU). No Substitution.

Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. 2.

D.

Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system.

Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. 2. 3.

Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G.

Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.

H.

Key Registration List (Bitting List): 1. 2.

3510.00

2017

Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.6

2017

MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A.

Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified. 1.

Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.

2.

Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.

3.

Extended cycle test: Locks to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA 156.2 requirements to 2 million cycles.

4.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b.

2.7

Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3300 Series. No Substitution.

LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A.

Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.8

Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications.

Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A.

General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1.

3510.00

At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2.

Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3.

Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4.

Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5.

Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.

6.

Motorized Electric Latch Retraction: Devices with an electric latch retraction feature must use motors which have a maximum current draw of 600mA. Solenoid driven latch retraction is not acceptable.

7.

Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. b.

3510.00

Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

8.

Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

9.

Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

10.

Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

11.

Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

12.

Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

2.9

2017

Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series.

DOOR CLOSERS A.

B.

3510.00

All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1.

General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2.

Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3.

Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4.

Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5.

Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6.

Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7.

Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units standard.

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 12

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

2.10 A.

Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC6000 Series. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series. Stanley Hardware (ST) - CLD-4551 Series.

ARCHITECTURAL TRIM Door Protective Trim 1.

General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2.

Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3.

Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

4.

Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a.

Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

5.

Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.

6.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

2.11

2017

Burns Manufacturing (BU). Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). Trimco (TC).

DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A.

General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B.

Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 13

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c.

2.12

Burns Manufacturing (BU). Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). Trimco (TC).

ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A.

General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B.

Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1.

C.

Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1.

Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D.

Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E.

Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F.

Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3.

2.13 A.

3510.00

National Guard Products (NG). Pemko Manufacturing (PE). Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 14

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

magnetic housing snap-lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b.

B.

Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1.

Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b. c. d.

2.14 A.

2.15

Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.

Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – 782. Security Door Controls (SD) - 630 Series. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series. Von Duprin (VD) - PS.

FABRICATION Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. FINISHES

A.

Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B.

Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware

C.

Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 15

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B.

Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3

INSTALLATION A.

Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1.

B.

Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

3510.00

Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 16

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

D.

Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E.

Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

3.5

Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. ADJUSTING

A.

3.6

Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B.

Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C.

Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7

DEMONSTRATION A.

3.8

Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A.

3510.00

The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 17

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B.

Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. RO - Rockwood 3. RU - Corbin Russwin 4. PE - Pemko 5. SU – Securitron

Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 3-SB03B Description: Exterior Egress x Access Control - Fire Rated 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Elec Hinge Prox Reader Fire Rated Elec Rim Exit Rim Cylinder Surface Closer Threshold Rain Guard Sweep ElectroLynx Harness Frame ElectroLynx Harness Door Door Position Switch Power Supply Integral Kerf Weatherstrip Wiring Diagram(s)

TA2314 NRP TA2314 QC8 By Security Contractor ED5200A N957 M92 MELR 3080 series, C6 DC6210 A11 253x3AFG 346C 3452AV QC-C3000P QC-C x required legnth By Security Contractor BPS series By HM frame mfr. Point-to-Point/Elev

US32D MK US32D MK OT 626 RU 626 RU 689 RU PE PE PE MK MK SU SU OT WW

Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Readers, controllers, software & credentials by others. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 18

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

Set: 2.0 Doors: 3-B90C Description: Exterior Storeroom Function Pair x Hold Open 6 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1

Hinge (heavy weight) Flush Bolt Storeroom Lock Mortise Cylinder Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop w/Holder Threshold Rain Guard Gasketing Sweep Steel Gate Hardware Metal Edge Astragal

T4A3786 NRP 555 CL3357 NZD C6 1080 series, C6 DC6200 A3 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 485 EXP 2005AT 346C 303APK 3452AV By Mfr. By Door Mfr.

US26D US26D 626 626 689 US32D US26D

MK RO RU RU RU RO RO PE PE PE PE OT OT

US32D 626 689 US26D

MK RU RU RO PE PE PE PE SU

Notes: Verify Gate-to-Door distance for door closer clearance. Set: 3.0 Doors: 3-S103 Description: Exterior Storeroom Function - Roof Access 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Storeroom Lock Surface Closer Door Stop Threshold Rain Guard Gasketing Door Bottom Door Position Switch

TA2314 NRP CL3357 NZD C6 DC6200 406/409/441CU 2005AT 346C 303APK 211APK By Security Contractor

Notes: Key required for roof access, free egress from roof to stairwell.

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 19

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

Set: 4.0 Doors: 3-G91 Description: Egress Inswing 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Rim Exit Device (classroom) Surface Closer Door Stop Threshold Gasketing Door Bottom Door Position Switch

TA2314 NRP ED5200 N955 DC6200 406/409/441CU 2005AT 303APK 211APK By Security Contractor

US32D 626 689 US26D

MK RU RU RO PE PE PE SU

US26D US26D 626 626 689 US32D US26D

MK MK RU RU RU RO RO PE PE MK MK SU SU WW

Set: 5.0 Doors: 3-SB03A Description: Egress x Access Control - Fire Rated 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Elec Hinge Fire Rated Elec Rim Exit Rim Cylinder Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop Gasketing Sweep ElectroLynx Harness Frame ElectroLynx Harness Door Door Position Switch Power Supply Wiring Diagram(s)

TA2714 NRP TA2714 QC8 ED5200A N957 M92 MELR 3080 series, C6 DC6200 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 406/409/441CU S88 315CN QC-C3000P QC-C x required legnth By Security Contractor BPS series Point-to-Point/Elev

Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Readers, controllers, software & credentials by others. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 20

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

Set: 6.0 Doors: 3-SG03 Description: Egress x Classroom Function - Fire Rated 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Rim Fire Exit Device (classroom) Rim Cylinder Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop Gasketing Sweep

TA2714 NRP ED5200A N955 3080 series, C6 DC6200 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 406/409/441CU S88 315CN

US26D 626 626 689 US32D US26D

MK RU RU RU RO RO PE PE

US26D 626 626 689 US32D US26D

MK RU RU RU RO RO RO

US26D 626 626 689 US32D

MK RU RU RU RO RO

Set: 7.0 Doors: 3-B91B Description: Egress x Classroom Function 3 1 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Rim Exit Device (classroom) Rim Cylinder Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop Silencer

TA2714 NRP ED5200 N955 3080 series, C6 DC6200 A3 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 406/409/441CU 608/608CA Set: 8.0

Doors: 3-B91A Description: Egress x Classroom Function x Deadstop Closer 3 1 1 1 1 3

Hinge Rim Exit Device (classroom) Rim Cylinder Surface Closer Kick Plate Silencer

3510.00

TA2714 NRP ED5200 N955 3080 series, C6 DC6210 A11 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 608/608CA

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 21

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

Set: 9.0 Doors: 3-B92 Description: Egress x Classroom Function Pair - Fire Rated 6 1 1 1 2 2 2 1

Hinge SVR Fire Exit Device (classroom) SVR Fire Exit Device (exit only) Rim Cylinder Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop Gasketing

2 Astragal

TA2714 NRP ED5470B N955 M55 ED5470B EO M55 3080 series, C6 DC6200 A3 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 406/409/441CU S88

US26D 626 626 626 689 US32D US26D

305CN

MK RU RU RU RU RO RO PE PE

Set: 10.0 Doors: 3-B90B Description: Storeroom Function - Fire Rated 3 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Storeroom Lock Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop Gasketing

3510.00

TA2714 NRP CL3357 NZD C6 DC6210 A11 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 406/409/441CU S88

DOOR HARDWARE

US26D 626 689 US32D US26D

MK RU RU RO RO PE

08 7100 - 22

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

Set: 11.0 Doors: 3-B90A Description: Inswing Pair to Mechanical x Access Control - Fire Rated 1 5 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Elec Hinge (heavy weight) Hinge (heavy weight) Auto Flush Bolt Set Prox Reader Fail Secure Electric Lock Coordinator Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop Gasketing ElectroLynx Harness Frame ElectroLynx Harness Door Door Position Switch Power Supply Metal Edge Astragal Wiring Diagram(s)

T4A3786 QC8 T4A3786 NRP 2845 By Security Contractor CL33905 NZD C6 576 DC6200 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 406/409/441CU S88 QC-C3000P QC-C x required legnth By Security Contractor BPS series By Door Mfr. Point-to-Point/Elev

US26D MK US26D MK US26D RO OT 626 RU US26D RO 689 RU US32D RO US26D RO PE MK MK SU SU OT WW

Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Readers, controllers, software & credentials by others. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 23

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

Set: 12.0 Doors: 3-G90 Description: Storeroom Function x Access Control - Fire Rated 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Hinge Elec Hinge Prox Reader Fail Secure Electric Lock Surface Closer Kick Plate Door Stop Gasketing ElectroLynx Harness Frame ElectroLynx Harness Door Door Position Switch Power Supply Wiring Diagram(s)

TA2714 NRP TA2714 QC8 By Security Contractor CL33905 NZD C6 DC6200 A3 K1050 10" 4BE CSK 406/409/441CU S88 QC-C3000P QC-C x required legnth By Security Contractor BPS series Point-to-Point/Elev

US26D MK US26D MK OT 626 RU 689 RU US32D RO US26D RO PE MK MK SU SU WW

Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times. Readers, controllers, software & credentials by others. Coordinate with electrical and security contractors.

END OF SECTION 08 7100

3510.00

DOOR HARDWARE

08 7100 - 24

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 08 9000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

1.3

Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.

DEFINITIONS A.

Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B.

Horizontal Louver: horizontal.

1.4

Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1.

1.5

Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (957 Pa), acting inward or outward.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1.6 3510.00

QUALITY ASSURANCE LOUVERS AND VENTS

08 9000 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

A.

Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

1.7

AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS A.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

B.

Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. 2. 3.

C. 2.2

Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.

Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B.

Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. 1.

3510.00

Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

08 9000 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

C.

Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D.

Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1.

Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F.

Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. 1.

2. G.

2.3

Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed mullions at corners.

Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A.

Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Greenheck, Model ESD-635 or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Louver Depth: 6 inches (150 mm) Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames. Mullion Type: Fully Recessed. Louver Performance Ratings: a. b.

2.4

3510.00

Airolite Company Nystrom Building Products. Ruskin Company

Free Area: Not less than 9.42 sq. ft. for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch(1220-mm-) high louver. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1060 fpm

LOUVER SCREENS

LOUVERS AND VENTS

08 9000 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION A.

2017

General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. 2. 3.

Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. Screen Location for Adjustable Louvers: Interior face unless otherwise indicated. Screening Type: Bird screening

B.

Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

C.

Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. 2. 3.

D.

Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1.

2.5

Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.60-mm) wire.

BLANK-OFF PANELS A.

Insulated, Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 2.6

Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm). Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch (0.81-mm) nominal thickness. Insulating Core: extruded-polystyrene foam . Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080inch (2.03-mm) nominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers. Attach blank-off panels with sheet metal screws.

FINISHES, GENERAL A.

2.7

3510.00

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ALUMINUM FINISHES

LOUVERS AND VENTS

08 9000 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

A.

Finish louvers after assembly.

B.

High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1.

Color and Gloss: Custom Color as selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

3.3

Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. INSTALLATION

A.

Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B.

Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C.

Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D.

Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E.

Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F.

Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

3510.00

LOUVERS AND VENTS

08 9000 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION G.

3.4

2017

Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements.

B.

Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

C.

Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

D.

Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1.

Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.

END OF SECTION 08 9000

3510.00

LOUVERS AND VENTS

08 9000 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.

Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior non-load-bearing wall studs.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B.

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

3510.00

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09 2216 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.2

2017

FRAMING SYSTEMS A.

B.

Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1.

Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2.

Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. 1.

Steel Studs and Runners: a. b.

2.

Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. b.

C.

Configuration: Asymmetrical.

Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. 2.

3510.00

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.

Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1.

F.

Depth: 1-1/2 inches. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. 2.

E.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or recommended by the manufacturer. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. 2.

D.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or recommended by the manufacturer. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

Depth: 3/4 inch. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09 2216 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3. G.

2.3

2017

Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inchdiameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1.

B.

Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1.

Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

PREPARATION A.

Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1.

3.3

Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

3510.00

Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09 2216 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.

2017

Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B.

Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C.

Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D.

Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4

INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A.

Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. 2. 3.

Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C.

Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D.

Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. 2.

Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. b. c.

3.

3510.00

Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09 2216 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

E.

F.

G.

2017

4.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

5.

Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

Direct Furring: 1.

Screw to wood framing.

2.

Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

Z-Furring Members: 1.

Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches 600 mm o.c.

2.

Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3.

At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

END OF SECTION 09 2216

3510.00

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09 2216 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2.

1.3

Interior gypsum board.

Section 06 1600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.

1.5

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. FIELD CONDITIONS

A.

Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B.

Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C.

Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

3510.00

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

1.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2.

Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

2.2

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A.

2.3

Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. 2. 3.

2.4

CertainTeed Corp. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. USG Corporation. With

Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. Long Edges: Tapered. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

TRIM ACCESSORIES A.

Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. 2.

3510.00

Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. Shapes:

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. b. c. d. 2.5

2017

Cornerbead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. Expansion (control) joint.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.

General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B.

Joint Tape: 1.

C.

Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. 2.

Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a.

3. 4. 2.6

Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B.

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

C.

Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1.

3510.00

Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION D.

2017

Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

E.

Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."

F.

Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A.

Comply with ASTM C 840.

B.

Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C.

Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D.

Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on

3510.00

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E.

Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F.

Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. 2. 3.

Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G.

Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H.

Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I.

Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J.

STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K.

Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.

Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1.

B.

3510.00

Type X: On walls, ceilings, and soffits.

Single-Layer Application:

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2.

On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. b.

3. 4. C.

Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

Multilayer Application: 1.

On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2.

On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.

4.

3.4

2017

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A.

General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. 2. 3.

3510.00

Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.5

2017

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A.

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B.

Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D.

Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. 2. 3.

Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a.

3.6

Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

PROTECTION A.

Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B.

Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C.

Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 09 2900

3510.00

GYPSUM BOARD

09 2900 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. 2.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2.

1.3

Steel. Galvanized metal.

Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

DEFINITIONS

A.

Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B.

Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C.

Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D.

Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E.

Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F.

Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.4

ACTION SUBMITTALS

3510.00

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

A.

Product Data: For each type of product. application instructions.

B.

Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.5

Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2.

1.7

Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. VOC content.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A.

1.6

Include preparation requirements and

Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

FIELD CONDITIONS

A.

Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B.

Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS

A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

3510.00

Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.2

2017

PAINT, GENERAL

A.

MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B.

Material Compatibility: 1. 2.

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C.

VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

Colors: As selected by Architect. 1.

2.3

METAL PRIMERS

A. 2.4

100 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. WATER-BASED PAINTS

A.

Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #163.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C.

Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.

3.2

Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

PREPARATION

3510.00

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B.

Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1.

C.

After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D.

Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

E.

Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3

APPLICATION

A.

Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

3510.00

Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

C.

If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E.

Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1.

Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. b. c. d. e. f.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. 2.

3.5

Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. Uninsulated metal piping. Pipe hangers and supports. Metal conduit. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. Exposed PVC piping.

Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A.

At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B.

After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3510.00

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.6

2017

EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A.

Steel Substrates: 1.

Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. b. c. d.

B.

Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.

Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. b. c.

Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.

END OF SECTION 09 9113

3510.00

EXTERIOR PAINTING

09 9113 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2.

1.3

Concrete. Concrete masonry units (CMU). Steel. Galvanized metal. Gypsum board.

Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

DEFINITIONS A.

Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B.

Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C.

Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D.

Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E.

Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F.

Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

3510.00

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION G. 1.4

2017

Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. ACTION SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product. application instructions.

B.

Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.5

Include preparation requirements and

Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. VOC content.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.

Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

1.6

Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2.

1.7

Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B.

Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS

3510.00

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

B.

2.2

2017

Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. PAINT, GENERAL

A.

MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B.

Material Compatibility: 1. 2.

C. 2.3

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

Colors: Match Architect's samples. Refer to Drawings. BLOCK FILLERS

A. 2.4

Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4. PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. 2.5

Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. METAL PRIMERS

A.

Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.

B.

Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.

2.6

LATEX PAINTS A.

Institutional Low Odor/VOC Latex, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143. 1. 2.

B. 3510.00

VOC Content: E Range of E3. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.

Institutional Low Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell), (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2. C.

VOC Content: E Range of E3. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.

High Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell) (Gloss Level 3): MPI #139. 1. 2.

D.

VOC Content: E Range of E3. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.

High Performance Architectural Latex, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPW #141. 1. 2.

2.7

2017

VOC Content: E Range of E1. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.

FLOOR COATINGS A.

2.8

Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI #99. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1.

Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2.

Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3.

Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

3510.00

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

2017

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Concrete: 12 percent. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C.

Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E.

Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.

3.2

Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

PREPARATION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B.

Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1.

C.

After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D.

Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E.

Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F.

Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3510.00

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION G.

3.3

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. APPLICATION

A.

Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B.

Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C.

If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E.

Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1.

Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a.

2.

3.

Equipment, including panelboards.

Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. b.

3.4

2017

Other items as directed by Architect. Ductwork.

Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

3510.00

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION A.

Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. 2.

3.5

2017

Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.

At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B.

After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6

INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.

Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1.

Water-Based Clear Sealer System: a. b.

B.

Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1.

System: a. b. c.

C.

Block Filler: B25W00025 – PrepRite Block Filler White. Intermediate Coat: B20W02651 – ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel. Topcoat: B20W02651 – ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel.

CMU Substrates: 1.

3510.00

First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors: MPI #99. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors: MPI #99.

System:

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. b. c. D.

System: a. b. c.

Prime Coat: B66W00310 – Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer Off White. Intermediate Coat: K45W00051 – Pro Industrial Waterbased PreCatalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel. Topcoat: K45W00051 – Pro Industrial Waterbased PreCatalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.

System: a. b. c.

F.

Block Filler, Heavy Duty B42W46 (18 mils wet). Intermediate Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy Eg-Shel, K45 Series. Top Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy Eg-Shel, K45 Series (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat).

Steel Substrates: 1.

E.

2017

Prime Coat: B66W00310 – Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer OffWhite. Intermediate Coat: K45W00051 Pro Industrial Waterbased PreCatalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel. Topcoat: K45W00051 – Pro Industrial Waterbased PreCatalyzed Epoxy Eg-Shel.

Gypsum Board Substrates: 1.

System: a. b. c.

Prime Coat: B28W02600 – ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer White. Intermediate Coat: B20W02651 – ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel. Topcoat: B20W02651 – ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel.

END OF SECTION 09 9123

3510.00

INTERIOR PAINTING

09 9123 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 10 4416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

1.3

Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. ACTION SUBMITTALS

A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. 1.5

Warranty: Sample of special warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A.

1.6

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. COORDINATION

A.

1.7

Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. WARRANTY

A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

3510.00

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10 4416 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION a. b. 2.

2017

Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B.

Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

2.2

Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.

PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A.

Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2. 3. 4.

B.

2.3

Amerex Corporation. Ansul Incorporated. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. Larsens Manufacturing Company. Nystrom Building Products. Potter Roemer LLC.

Valves: Manufacturer's standard. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameledsteel container. MOUNTING BRACKETS

3510.00

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10 4416 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION A.

2017

Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

B.

Amerex Corporation. Ansul Incorporated. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. Larsens Manufacturing Company. Nystrom Building Products. Potter Roemer LLC.

Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1.

Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a.

"FIRE

Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1.

B. 3.2

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

B.

Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

Mounting Brackets: locations indicated.

Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at

END OF SECTION 10 4416

3510.00

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

10 4416 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Protecting existing vegetation to remain. Removing existing vegetation. Clearing and grubbing. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures.

DEFINITIONS A.

Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B.

Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C.

Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D.

Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

3510.00

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1.4

2017

MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A.

1.5

Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A.

Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B.

Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

1.6

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.7

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. 2.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

C.

Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentationcontrol measures are in place.

D.

The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3510.00

Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. Parking vehicles or equipment. Foot traffic. Erection of sheds or structures. Impoundment of water. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION E.

2017

Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS A.

Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." 1.

Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B.

Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to above the ground.

C.

Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1.

3.2

Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A.

Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C.

Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D.

Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3510.00

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.3

2017

EXISTING UTILITIES A.

Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed. 1. 2.

Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

B.

Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

C.

Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

Notify Owner and Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

D.

Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

E.

Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with applicable fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security and utilities sections and Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition."

3.4

CLEARING AND GRUBBING A.

Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.5

Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. Chip removed tree branches and.

TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.

Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B.

Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

3.6

SITE IMPROVEMENTS A.

3510.00

Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 1. 2.

3.7

2017

Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.

Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 31 1000

3510.00

SITE CLEARING

31 1000 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 31 2000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. Section 31 5000 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations.

DEFINITIONS A.

Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. 2.

Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B.

Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C.

Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

3510.00

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

D.

Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E.

Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1.

2. 3.

Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owner / Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Owner / Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

F.

Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G.

Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock-excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

H.

Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I.

Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J.

Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K.

Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site. 1.

Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the following: a. b.

3510.00

Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays. Coordination of Work with utility locator service. EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION c. d. e. 1.5

2017

Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of treeand plant-protection zones. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade. Field quality control.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B.

Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. 2.

1.6

Classification according to ASTM D 2487. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.7

Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated. FIELD CONDITIONS

A.

Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth-moving operations. 1. 2.

B.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and sedimentation-control measures specified Section 31 1000 "Site Clearing" are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SOIL MATERIALS A.

General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B.

Satisfactory Soils: Satisfactory soils are those specified in the recommendations of the referenced Subsurface Investigation (located at the end of this Section) for the proposed intended use. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Unsatisfactory soils are those

3510.00

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 3

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

specified in the recommendations of the referenced Subsurface Investigation (located at the end of this Section) for the proposed intended use. 1.

Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

C.

Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

D.

Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 294/D 2940M 0; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E.

Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

F.

Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G.

Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

H.

Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch (25-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

I.

Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.

J.

Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A.

Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows: 1.

3510.00

Red: Electric. EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 4

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2. 3. 4. 5.

2017

Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. Orange: Telephone and other communications. Blue: Water systems. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B.

Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C.

Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2

DEWATERING A.

Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B.

Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1.

3.3

Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

EXPLOSIVES A.

3.4

Explosives: Do not use explosives. EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A.

Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1.

3510.00

If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 5

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.5

2017

EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.

Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1.

3.6

Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A.

3.7

Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A.

Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1.

B.

Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. 1.

C.

3.8

Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

Clearance: As indicated on the drawings.

Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 6inches (150 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe. SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A.

Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B.

If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C.

Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes) to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1.

3510.00

Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 6

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.

2017

Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D.

Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E.

Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.9

UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A.

Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect. 1.

3.10 A.

STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.

3.11 A.

Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

3510.00

Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

BACKFILL

1.

B.

Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. Removing concrete formwork. Removing trash and debris. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 7

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.12

2017

UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B.

Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C.

Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within [18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D.

Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch-(100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm)below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E.

Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

F.

Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13

SOIL FILL

A.

Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B.

Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C. 3.14 A.

Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1.

3510.00

Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 8

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 2.

3.15

2017

Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A.

Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B.

Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C.

Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.16 A.

GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. 2.

B.

3510.00

Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95percent. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85percent.

Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) Pavements: Plus or minus1/2 inch (13 mm)

Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge. EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 9

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.17 A.

SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm). 1. 2.

3.18

2017

Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch-(150-mm-)thick compacted layers to final subgrade.

SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A.

Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B.

On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. 2. 3.

3.19

Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A.

Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B.

On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3510.00

Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 10

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION 3.20 A.

2017

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. 2. 3.

Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. Determine that fill material classification and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. Determine, during placement and compaction, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements.

B.

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C.

Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D.

When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.21

PROTECTION

A.

Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B.

Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1.

C.

Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.

3.22 A.

Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 31 2000 3510.00

EARTH MOVING

31 2000 - 11

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION

2017

SECTION 31 5000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.

B.

Related Requirements: 1.

1.3

Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for excavating and backfilling and for controlling surface-water runoff and ponding.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B.

Contractor Calculations: For excavation support and protection system. Include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C.

Existing Conditions: Using photographs, show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by inadequate performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins.

D.

Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped utilities, abandoned-in-place support and protection systems, and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions.

1.4

FIELD CONDITIONS A.

Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

3510.00

Notify Owner no fewer than four days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner's written permission.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

31 5000 - 1

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION B.

2017

Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. 1. 2.

Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection according to the performance requirements. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

Provide, design, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting earth and hydrostatic pressures and superimposed and construction loads. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Contractor Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. Continuously monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements to ensure stability of excavations and constructed slopes and to ensure that damage to permanent structures is prevented.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1.

B.

Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.

3510.00

Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

31 5000 - 2

GOOD SAMARITAN NORTH HEALTH CENTER MECHANICAL BUILDING ADDITION C.

3.2

2017

Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that construction and finishing of other work is not impeded. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Promptly correct detected bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection system remains stable.

B.

Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installation or faulty performance of excavation support and protection systems.

3.3

REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A.

Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and earth and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils and rock or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1. 2.

Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving." Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.

END OF SECTION 31 5000

3510.00

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

31 5000 - 3

Smile Life

When life gives you a hundred reasons to cry, show life that you have a thousand reasons to smile

Get in touch

© Copyright 2015 - 2024 PDFFOX.COM - All rights reserved.